B 


C  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACI 

1  III  iliil 

ooo  oooo  coco< 

H 

1 

6 

^H  . 

^M| 

^H    MANUAL 

PHYSICAL  TRAINING 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY 
J914 


)rnia 
al 


AVAR  Department, 

Document  No.  436. 

Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff 


U3Z,3 


War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 
i  Washington,  February  20,  1914. 

^       The  following  Manual  of  Physical  Training,  prepared  by  a  board 
I     of  officers  consisting  of  Lieut.  Col.  Fred  W.  Sladen,  United  States 
^   Army;  Capt.  Herman  J.  Koehler,  United  States  Army;  and  First 
Lieut.  Philip  Mathews,  Coast  Artillery  Corps,  is  published  for  the 
information  and  government  of  the  Regular  Army  and  the  Organized 
Militia  of  the  United  States. 

In  the  preparation  of  this  Manual  the  demands  of  the  service  and 

the  facilities  to  meet  these  demands  were  constantly  kept  in  mind. 

The  board  also  endeavored  to  treat  the  subject  in  a  manner  that 

would  insure  its  successful  application  by  all  officers,  thus  making  it 

possible  to  place  this  part  of  the  soldiers'  training  upon  a  permanent 

and  uniform  basis. 

>-      There  is  nothing  in  the  education  of  the  soldier  of  more  vital 

'C  importance  than  this,  and  while  considerable  has  been  accomplished 

c  5  by  some  commands  in  this  respect  in  the  past  it  has,  owing  to  the 

-  -•  absence  of  any  well-defined  authorized  method  of  procedure,  lacked 

-  =  system  and  uniformity,  without  which  the  benefits  to  the  service  in 
re  general  will  continue  to  remain  a  negligible  quantity. 

ZD  The  physical  training  of  the  enlisted  men  should,  therefore,  be 
J  carried  out  in  accordance  with  the  instructions  laid  down  herein. 
Officers  to  whom  this  work  is  intrusted  will  find  the  material  the 
Manual  affords  and  its  arrangement  more  than  ample  to  meet  any 
condition.  WTiile  a  strict  adherence  to  the  text  or  the  manner  of  its 
application  is  not  necessarily  to  be  insisted  upon,  departures  from  it 
that  are  at  variance  with  its  methods  generally  should  not  be 
encouraged. 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood. 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 


aiciGio 


THE  OBJECT  AND  SCOPE  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING 
IN  THE  SERYICE. 


OBJECT. 


The  objects  which  a  course  in  physical  training  in  the  service  aim 
to  attain  are  the  development  of  the  physical  attributes  of  every 
individual  to  the  fullest  extent  of  his  possibilities. 
These,  in  order  of  their  importance,  may  be  summed  up  as  follows: 
(a)  General  health  and  bodily  vigor. 
(6)  Muscular  strength  and  endurance. 

(c)  Self-reliance. 

(d)  Smartness,  activity,  and  precision. 

It  is  upon  the  first  of  these,  health  and  bodily  vigor,  that  the  devel- 
opment of  all  the  other  qualities  so  essential  in  a  soldier  are  depend- 
ent, and  for  that  reason  the  maintenance  of  robust  health  and  the 
development  of  organic  vigor  should  be  considered  the  primary  object 
of  this  training. 

The  tendency  of  the  age  is  to  treat  all  conditions  of  health  from  a 
pathological  standpoint;  and  while  much  has  been  accomplished  in 
the  way  of  increasing  the  resistive  powers  of  the  human  organism 
against  the  inroads  of  disease  by  means  of  inoculation  and  other 
methods  of  prevention,  the  development  of  the  inherent  power  of 
resistance,  which  every  individual  possesses  in  a  greater  or  lesser 
degree  by  means  of  natural  physiological  methods,  has  been  much 
neglected. 

It  is  not  sufficient,  however,  for  a  soldier  to  be  healthy;  his  pro- 
fession demands  that  he  possess  more  than  the  average  amount  of 
muscular  strength  and  endurance  in  addition  to  good  health,  in 

5 


6  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

order  that  he  may  be  ready  to  exchange  the  comparative  comforts 
of  barrack  life  for  the  hardships  of  field  service  at  any  moment  with- 
out diminishing  his  effectiveness.  Hence,  the  preparatory  training 
he  receives  must  contain  those  elements  that  will  enable  him  to  do 
BO  successfully. 

"With  robust  health  as  a  basis  and  with  the  knowledge  that  he  is 
the  possessor  of  more  than  average  strength  and  endurance,  he  must 
be  taught  how  to  value  the  former  and  how  to  use  the  latter  to  the 
Jaest  advantage.  By  doing  so  he  will  unwittingly  develop  self- 
reliance,  which,  after  all,  is  a  physical  quality,  as  it  induces  men  to 
dare  because  of  the  consciousness  to  do. 

Smartness,  acti\ity,  and  precision  are  the  physical  expressions  of 
mental  activity.  All  are  essential  soldierly  qualities,  as  they  make 
for  self-respect,  neatness,  and  grace,  which  combined  spell  discipline. 
Precision  and  exactitude  should  therefore  always  be  insisted  upon 
in  the  performance  of  all  exercises  prescribed. 

In  the  endeavor  to  attain  the  objects  referred  to  above  the  soldier 
will  be  the  recipient  of  a  course  of  training  that  can  not  fail  to  develop 
him  harmoniously,  and  the  liability  of  developing  one  portion  of  his 
body  at  the  expense  of  another  will  be  obviated. 

SCOPE. 

The  material  at  the  disposal  of  instructors  embraces: 

1.  Setting-up  exercises. 

2.  Marching  at  quick  or  double  time  and  running. 

3.  Dumb-bell,  club,  and  rifle  exercises. 

4.  Climbing. 

5.  Jumping. 

6.  Apparatus  work. 

7.  Gymnastic  contests. 

8.  Athletics. 

9.  Swimming. 

10.  Boxing  and  wrestling. 


SCOPE.  7 

Setting-up  exercises  are  the  foundation  upon  which  the  entire  coiu^e 
of  training  in  the  service  is  based.  Their  importance  can  not  be 
overestimated,  as  by  means  of  them  alone  it  is  possible  to  effect  an 
all-around  development  impossible  of  attainment  by  any  other 
method.  They  should  therefore  form  a  very  important  part  of 
every  drill. 

Marching  in  quick  time  and  exercises  calling  into  action  the  various 
parts  of  the  body  while  marching  tend  to  develop  coordination, 
upon  which  to  a  great  extent  poise,  posture,  carriage,  and  rhythm 
are  dependent.  Marching  in  double  time  is  a  heart  and  lung  devel- 
oping exercise  of  moderate  severity.  Running,  on  the  other  hand, 
especially  when  continued  for  long  periods,  or  at  a  high  rate  of  speed, 
or  when  taken  in  conjunction  with  leg  exercises,  affects  those  organs 
in  a  very  marked  degree.  Both  double  timing  and  running  are 
invaluable  in  the  development  of  endurance  and  organic  vigor. 

Dumb-bell  exercises  are  closely  allied  to  the  setting-up  exercises 
and  differ  from  these  only  by  the  extra  weight  that  is  imposed  by 
the  bells,  which  should,  however,  never  exceed  2  pounds. 

Club  exercises  are  of  use  principally  as  a  means  for  the  development 
I  of  coordination  and  grace  in  the  upper  extremities;  their  weight, 
j  since  muscular  development  is  not  aimed  at,  should  not  exceed  2 
j  pounds. 

I  Rifle  exercises  have  for  their  object  the  development  of ' ' handiness  " 
I  with  the  piece.  Owing  to  the  weight  of  the  rifle  they  are  powerful 
)  factors  in  the  developmept  of  the  muscles  of  the  arms,  upper  back, 
I  shoulders,  and  chest,  and  when  taken  in  conjunction  with  trunk  and 
;  leg  exercises  they  are  excellent  agents  for  the  all-round  development 
j  of  those  who  possess  the  strength  to  wield  the  piece  to  advantage, 
j  Climbing,  on  poles  or  ropes,  when  both  arms  and  legs  are  used, 
i'  brings  into  action  nearly  every  muscle  of  the  body  and  exerts  con- 
j  siderable  influence  upon  the  heart.  Where  poles  or  ropes  of  suffi- 
cient length  are  used  this  exercise  will  also  develop  self-reliance. 

Jumping,  when  indulged  in  as  a  gymnastic  exercise,  where  a 
series  of  from  8  to  10  jumps  of  moderate  length  are  executed  sue- 


8  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

cessively,  is  essentially  a  leg  and  heart  developing  exercise.  When 
iorm  is  insisted  upon  and  the  nature  of  the  jump  is  varied  by  intro- 
ducing various  leg,  arm,  and  trunk  movements,  it  becomes  a  strong 
factor  in  the  development  of  coordination. 

Apparatus  work  should  be  supplementary  to  all  other  forms  of 
training.  The  chief  object  of  this  work  in  the  service  should  be  to 
use  it  as  a  means  for  the  development  of  the  ability  of  the  soldier  to 
control  his  body  while  its  weight  is  supported  by  or  suspended  from 
the  arms  and  hands,  in  order  to  enable  him  to  successfully  overcome 
and  surmount  such  obstacles  as  may  present  themselves  during 
field  service.  The  exercises  composing  this  part  of  the  training 
should,  therefore,  be  confined  to  those  that  will  develop  the  muscular 
strength  of  the  entire  body  in  general  and  that  of  the  arms  and  legs 
in  particular,  and  at  the  same  time  tend  to  make  the  soldier  agile  and 
active  and  teach  him  decision  and  self-reliance. 

Gymnastic  contests  are  the  simj^ler  forms  of  antagonistic  gymnastics 
in  which  the  participants  are  pitted  against  each  other,  and  which 
never  fail  to  induce  the  usual  rivalry  for  superiority  attending  per- 
sonal contests.  Their  chief  value  lies  in  the  development  of  agility 
and  quickness  of  thought  and  action.  They  are  quite  the  most  inter- 
esting of  those  exercises  in  which  the  effort  is  lost  sight  of  in  the 
•desire  to  win. 

Athletics,  when  employed  for  the  sake  of  their  value  as  a  means  for 
the  development  of  large  numbers,  which  should  be  the  case  in  the 
:service,  have  nothing  in  common  with  competitive  athletics.  In 
other  words,  their  value  lies  entirely  in  their  usefulness  in  the  devel- 
opment of  physical  strength,  endurance,  and  skill,  and  not  in  the 
making  or  breaking  of  records. 

Swimming  is  of  vital  importance  to  everyone  connected  with  the 
;service,  and  it  should  be  made  obligatory  upon  all  officers  and  en- 
listed men  to  make  themselves  proficient  in  it.  Aside  from  its  use- 
fulness it  is  without  doubt  the  best  single  means  to  all  round  physical 
•development. 


METHODS.  9 

Boxing  and  vjrestling,  while  not  recommended  as  an  obligatory- 
part  of  the  enlisted  man's  training,  should  still  be  encouraged  at  all 
times,  not  only  on  account  of  their  value  as  a  means  to  bodily  devel- 
opment, but  on  account  of  the  self-reliance  and  confidence  they  give 
to  those  who  are  proficient  in  them. 

METHODS. 

In  the  employment  of  the  various  forms  of  physical  training 
enumerated  above  it  is  necessary  that  well-defined  methods  should 
"be  introduced  in  order  that  the  object  of  this  training  may  be  attained 
in  the  most  thorough  and  systematic  manner.  WTienever  it  la 
possible  this  work  should  be  conducted  out  of  doors.  In  planning 
these  methods  the  following  factors  must  be  considered: 

(a)  The  condition  and  physical  aptitude  of  the  men. 

(6)  The  facilities. 

(c)  The  time. 

{d)  Instruction  material. 
The  question  of  the  -physical  aptitude  and  general  condition,  etc.,  of 
the  men  is  a  very  important  one,  and  it  should  always  determine 
the  nature  and  extent  of  the  task  expected  of  them;  never  should 
the  work  be  made  the  determining  factor.  In  general,  it  is  advis- 
able to  divide  the  men  into  three  classes,  viz,  the  recruit  class,  the 
intermediate  class,  and  the  advanced  class.  The  work  for  each 
class  should  fit  the  capabilities  of  the  members  of  that^class  and  in 
every  class  it  should  be  arranged  progressively. 

Facilities  are  necessarily  to  be  considered  in  any  plan  of  instruc- 
tion, but  as  most  posts  are  now  equipped  with  better  than  average 
facilities  the  plan  laid  down  in  this  Manual  will  answer  all  purposes. 
Time  is  a  decidedly  important  factor,  and  no  plan  can  be  made 
unless  those  in  charge  of  this  work  know  exactly  how  much  time 
they  have  at  their  disposal.  During  the  suspension  of  drills  five 
periods  a  week,  each  of  45  minutes  duration,  should  be  devoted  to 
physical  training;  during  the  drill  period  a  15-minute  drill  in 
setting-up  exercises  should  be  ordered  on  drill  days.     The  time  of 


10  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

day,  too,  is  important.  ^Mlen  possible,  these  drills  should  be  held 
in  the  morning  about  tvro  hours  after  breakfast,  and  at  no  time 
should  tliey  be  held  immediately  before  or  after  a  meal. 

The  proper  use  of  the  instruction  material  is  undoubtedly  the 
most  important  part  of  an  instructor's  dut^',  for  it  not  only  means 
the  selection  of  the  proper  material  but  its  application.  Every 
exercise  has  a  function  peculiarly  its  own;  in  other  words,  it  has  a 
certain  effect  upon  a  certain  part  of  the  body  and  plays  a  role  in  the 
development  of  the  men.  It  is,  therefore,  the  sum  of  these  various 
exercises  properly  grouped  that  constitutes  the  method.  So  far  as 
possible,  ever^'  lesson  should  be  planned  to  embrace  setting-up 
exercises  that  call  into  action  all  parts  of  the  body,  applied  gymnas- 
tics, apparatus  work,  and  exercises  that  develop  coordination  and 
skill,  such  as  jumping  and  vaulting. 

The  best  results  are  obtained  when  these  exercises  which  affect 
the  extensor  muscles  chiefly  are  followed  by  those  affecting  the 
flexors;  i.  e.,  flexion  should  always  be  followed  by  extension,  or 
vice  versa.  It  is  also  ad^'isable  that  a  movement  requiring  a  con- 
siderable amount  of  muscular  exertion  should  be  followed  by  one 
in  which  this  exertion  is  reduced  to  a  minimum.  As  a  rule,  espe- 
cially in  the  setting-up  exercises,  one  portion  of  the  body  should  not 
be  exercised  successively;  thus,  arm  exercises  should  be  followed 
by  a  trunk  exercise,  and  that  in  turn  by  a  leg,  shoulder,  or  neck 
exercise. 

The  following  program  of  a  week's  work  illustrates  the  application 
of  ihe  instruction  material  as  described  above:  each  drill  is  of  45 
minutes  duration: 

First  Day's  Program. 

1.  Marching  in  quick  and  double  time  (5  minutesV 

2.  Setting-up  exercises  (15  minutesV 

3.  Applied  g^-mnastics,  flexor  work,  horizontal  bar  (15  minutes). 

4.  Jumping  exercises  (8  minutes). 

5.  Trunk  and  arm  stretching  exercises  in  conjunction  with  breathing 

exercises  (2  minutes). 


METHODS.  11 

Second  Day's  Program. 

Exercises  in  marching,  combined  with  arm  and  leg  exercises  (10 

minutes). 
Setting-up  exercises,  chiefly  trunk  exercises  (5  minutes). 
Applied  gymnastics,  extensor  work,  parallel  bars  (15  minutes). 
Vaulting,  low  vaulting  bars  (13  minutes). 
Stretching  and  breathing  exercises  (2  minutes). 

Third  Day's  Program. 

Marching  in  double  and  quick  time  (5  minutes). 
Setting-up  exercises,  general  work  (15  minutes). 
Applied  gymnastics,  flexor  work,  rings  (15  minutes). 
Jumping  exercises  (8  minutes). 
Stretching  and  breathing  exercises  (2  minutes). 

Fourth  Day's  Program. 

Running  and  walking  (5  minutes). 

Setting-up  exercises,  general  work  (10  minutes). 

Applied  gymnastics,  extensor  work,  side  horse  (15  minutes). 

Climbing  (13  minutes). 

Stretching  and  breathing  exercises  (2  minutes). 

Fifth  Day's  Program. 

Marching  quick  time,  running,  and  exercises  while  marching  in 
quick  time  (10  minutes). 

Setting-up  exercises,  trunk  movements  (5  minutes). 

AppUed  gymnastics,  flexor  work,  horizontal  bar  (15  minutes). 

Vaulting,  side  horse  vaults  (13  minutes). 

Stretching  and  breathing  exercises  (2  minutes). 

Clubs,  dumb-bells,  bar  bells,  wands,  or  rifles  may  be  substituted 
for  the  setting-up  exercises  occasionally,  and  the  gymnastic  con- 
tests may  also  be  used  in  place  of  the  jumping  and  vaulting  exercises. 


12  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Large  numbers  may  be  employed  in  a  body  in  the  setting-up  exer- 
cises and  also  in  the  exercises  with  the  clubs,  etc.  In  the  applied  or 
apparatus  work,  unless  the  facilities  afford  a  sufficient  number  of  the 
same  kind  of  apparatus,  it  is  advisable  to  di^■ide  the  men  into  small 
squads. 

Officers  who  have  been  placed  in  charge  of  this  work  must  not  for 
an  instant  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  to  them  has  been  intrusted  a 
part  of  the  soldier's  training  which  is  of  great  importance,  and  that 
success  or  failure  is  dependent  entirely  upon  themselves.  Work  as 
important  as  this  is  worthy  of  the  best  efforts,  and  it  should  never  be 
intrusted  to  those  who  are  not  enthusiastic  about  it. 

\\Tienever  possible  the  officer  in  charge  should  conduct  the 
work  personally,  as  in  no  profession  does  the  individuality  and 
personal  influence  of  a  leader  cany  such  weight  as  it  does  in  the 
militar^^ 

A  well-defined  program  should  be  mapped  out  before  the  drill 
begins,  and  this  should  be  carried  out  faithfully.  Even*'  day's  work 
should  dovetail  into  the  next  and  be  progressive. 

Instructors  should  not  fail  to  do  as  much  as  possible  themselves, 
as  an  example  is  always  more  impressive  than  a  precept;  it  will  also 
serve  to  keep  the  officer  in  fit  condition. 

"\Miere  commands  are  large,  the  athletic  officer  should  be  given 
officer  assistants,  whom  he  should  train  so  that  they  may  be  able  to 
cany  out  his  program  intelligently.  If  officers  are  not  available, 
he  should  select  likely  enlisted  men  and  train  them  to  be  leaders 
capable  of  taking  charge  of  a  squad. 

The  work  laid  down  in  this  manual  should  not  be  followed  blindly; 
every  instnictor  should  select  such  portions,  and  if  necessary  vary 
them,  as  in  his  opinion  are  productive  of  the  best  results  under  the 
conditions  under  which  he  is  laboring. 

The  work  should  be  so  conducted  that  the  men  are  developed 
harmoniously;  that  is,  any  tendency  to  develop  one  side  or  one 
portion  of  the  body  at  the  expense  of  the  other  should  be  avoided. 


METHODS.  13 

Insist  upon  accurate  and  precise  execution  of  every  movement. 
By  doing  so  those  other  essential  qualities,  besides  strength  and 
endurance — activity,  agility,  gracefulness,  and  accuracy — will  also 
be  developed. 

Exercises  which  require  activity  and  agility,  rather  than  those 
that  require  strength  only,  should  be  selected. 

It  should  be  constantly  borne  in  mind  that  these  exercises  are 
the  means  and  not  the  end;  and  if  there  be  a  doubt  in  the  mind  of 
the  instructor  as  to  the  effect  of  an  exercise,  it  is  always  well  to  err 
upon  the  side  of  safety.  Underdoing  is  rectifiahle;  overdoing  is  often 
not.  The  object  of  this  work  is  not  the  development  of  expert 
gymnasts,  but  the  development  of  physically  sound  men  by  means 
of  a  system  in  which  the  chances  of  bodily  injury  are  reduced  to  a 
minimum.  WTien  individuals  show  a  special  aptitude  for  gym- 
nastics they  may  be  encouraged,  within  limits,  to  improve  this 
ability,  but  never  at  the  expense  of  their  fellows. 

The  drill  should  be  made  attractive,  and  this  can  best  be  accom- 
plished by  employing  the  mind  as  well  as  the  body.  The  movements 
should  be  as  varied  as  possible,  thus  constantly  offering  the  men 
something  new  to  make  them  keep  their  minds  on  their  work.  A 
movement  many  times  repeated  presents  no  attraction  and  is  exe- 
cuted in  a  purely  mechanical  manner  which  should  always  be  dis- 
countenanced. 

Short  and  frequent  drills  should  be  given  in  preference  to  long 
ones,  which  are  liable  to  exhaust  all  concerned,  and  exhaustion 
means  lack  of  interest  and  benefit.  All  movements  should  be  care- 
fully explained,  and,  if  necessary,  illustrated  by  the  instructor. 

The  lesson  should  begin  with  the  least  violent  exercises,  gradually 
working  up  to  those  that  are  more  so,  then  gradually  working  back 
to  the  simpler  ones,  so  that  the  men  at  the  close  of  the  drill  will  be 
in  as  nearly  a  normal  condition  as  possible. 

^Tien  one  portion  of  the  body  is  being  exercised,  care  should'  be 
taken  that  the  other  parts  remain  quiet  so  far  as  the  conformation  of 


14  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

the  body  \rill  allow.  The  men  must  learn  to  exercise  any  one  part 
of  the  body  independent  of  the  other  parts. 

Everything  in  connection  -with  physical  training  should  be  such 
that  the  men  look  forward  to  it  with  pleasure,  not  with  dread,  for 
the  mind  exert-s  more  influence  over  the  human  body  than  all  the 
gymnastic  paraphernalia  that  was  ever  invented. 

Exercise  should  be  carried  on  as  much  as  possible  in  the  open  air; 
at  all  tim^s  in  pure,  dry  air. 

All  the  men  except  those  excused  by  the  post  surgeon  should  be 
compelled  to  attend  these  drills. 

Never  exercise  the  men  to  the  point  of  exhaustion.  If  there  is 
e^'idence  of  panting,  faintness,  fatigue,  or  pain,  the  exercise  should 
be  stopped  at  once,  for  it  is  nature's  way  of  sapng  ''too  much." 

By  constant  practice  the  men  should  learn  to  breathe  slowly 
through  the  nostrils  during  all  exercises,  especially  while  running. 

A  fundamental  condition  of  exercise  is  unimpeded  respiration. 
Proper  breathing  should  always  be  insisted  upon;  '"holding  the 
breath"  and  breathing  only  when  it  can  no  longer  be  held  is  inju- 
rious. Every  exercise  should  be  accompanied  by  an  unimpeded 
and  if  possible  by  an  uninterrupted  act  of  respiration,  the  inspira- 
tion and  respiration  of  which  depends  to  a  great  extent  upon  the 
natm-e  of  the  exercise.  Inhalation  should  always  accompany  that 
part  of  an  exercise  which  tends  to  elevate  and  distend  the  thorax — 
as  raising  arms  over  head  laterally,  for  instance;  while  that  part  of 
an  exercise  which  exerts  a  pressiu-e  against  the  walls  of  the  chest 
should  be  accompanied  by  exhalation,  as  for  example,  lowering 
arms  laterally  from  shoulders  or  overhead. 

If  after  exercising,  the  breathing  becomes  labored  and  distressed, 
it  is  an  unmistakable  sign  that  the  work  has  been  excessive.  Such 
excess! veness  is  not  infrequently  the  cause  of  serious  injiu^^  to  the 
heart  and  lungs,  or  to  both.  In  cases  where  exercise  produces  palpi- 
tation, labored  respiration,  etc..  it  is  advisable  to  recommend  abso- 
lute rest,  or  to  order  such  exercises  that  will  relieve  the  oppressed 


METHODS.  15 

and  overtaxed  organ.  Leg  exercises  slowly  executed  will  afford 
such  relief;  by  drawing  the  blood  from  the  upper  to  the  lower  ex- 
tremities they  equalize  the  circulation,  thereby  lessening  the  heart's 
action  and  quieting  the  respiration. 

Never  exercise  immediately  after  a  meal;  digestion  is  more  im- 
portant at  this  time  than  extraneous  exercise. 

Never  eat  or  drink  immediately  after  exercise;  allow  the  body  to 
recover  its  normal  condition  first,  and  the  most  beneficial  results 
will  follow.  If  necessarj^,  pure  water,  not  too  cold,  may  be  taken 
in  small  quantities,  but  the  exercise  should  be  continued,  especially 
if  in  a  state  of  perspiration. 

Never,  if  at  all  possible,  allow  the  underclothing  to  dry  on  the 
body.  Muscular  action  produces  an  unusual  amount  of  bodily  heat; 
this  should  be  lost  gradually,  otherwise  the  body  "^dll  be  chilled; 
hence,  after  exercise,  never  remove  clothing  to  cool  off,  but,  on  the 
contran,',  wear  some  wrap  in  addition.  In  like  manner,  be  well 
wrapped  up  on  leaving  the  gAminasium. 

Cold  baths,  especially  when  the  body  is  heated,  as  in  the  case 
after  exercising  violently,  should  be  discouraged.  In  individual 
instances  such  baths  may  appear  apparently  beneficial,  or  at  least 
not  injurious;  in  a  majority  of  cases,  however,  they  can  not  be  used 
with  impunity.  Tepid  baths  are  recommended,  ^\^len  impossible 
to  bathe,  the  flannels  worn  wliile  exercising  should  be  stripped  off, 
the  body  sponged  with  tepid  water,  and  then  rubbed  thoroughly 
with  coarse  towels.  After  such  a  sponge  the  body  should  be  clothed 
in  clean,  warm  clothing. 

Flannel  is  the  best  material  to  wear  next  to  the  body  during  phys- 
ical drill,  as  it  absorbs  the  perspiration,  protects  the  body  against 
drafts  and  in  a  mild  manner  excites  the  skin.  WTien  the  conditions 
permit  it  the  men  may  be  exercised  in  the  ordinary  athletic  costume, 
sleeveless  shirt,  flappers,  socks,  and  gymnasium  shoes. 


COMMANDS— SETTING-UP  EXERCISES, 


COMMANDS. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  commands: 

The  preparatory  indicates  the  movement  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution  causes  the  execution. 

In  thecommand:  1.  Arms  forward,  2.  RAISE,  the  words  ^rms/or- 
uard  constitute  the  preparatory  command,  and  RAISE,  the  com- 
mand of  execution.  Preparatory  commands  are  printed  in  ordinary 
type,  and  those  of  execution  in  CAPITALS. 

The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness 
proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  for  whom  it  is  intended. 

The  various  movements  comprising  an  exercise  are  executed  by 
commands  and,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  the  continuation  of  an 
exercise  is  carried  out  by  repeating  the  command,  which  usually 
takes  the  form  of  numerals,  the  numbers  depending  upon  the  num- 
ber of  movements  that  an  exercise  comprises.  Thus,  if  an  exercise 
consists  of  two  movements,  the  counts  will  be  one,  two;  or  if  it  con- 
sists of  eight  movements,  the  counts  will  be  correspondingly  in- 
creased; thus  every  movement  is  designated  by  a  separate  command. 

Occasionally,  especially  in  exercises  that  are  to  be  executed 
slowly,  words  rather  than  numerals  are  used,  and  these  must  be 
indicative  of  the  nature  of  the  various  movements. 

In  the  continuation  of  an  exercise  the  preparatory  command  ia 
explanatory,  the  command  of  execution  causes  the  execution  and 
the  continuation  is  caused  by  a  repetition  of  numerals  denoting 
the  number  of  movements  required,  or  of  words  describing  the 
movements  if  words  are  used.     The  numerals  or  words  preceding  the 

31853°— 14 2  17 


18  MANUAL   OF   PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

command  HALT  should  ahva}  s  be  given  with  a  rising  inflection  on 
the  first  numeral  or  word  of  command  of  the  last  repetition  of  the 
exercise  in  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  the  command  HALT. 

For  example: 

1.  Arms  to  tlirust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Thrust  arms  upward,  4.  EXER- 
CISE, ONE,  TWO,  ONE,  TWO,  ONE,  HALT;  the  rising  inflection 
preparatory  to  the  command  HALT  being  placed  on  the  "one'' 
preceding  the  "HALT." 

Each  command  must  indicate,  by  its  tone,  how  that  particular 
movement  is  to  be  executed;  thus,  if  an  exercise  consists  of  two 
movements,  one  of  wliich  is  to  be  energized,  the  command  corre- 
sponding to  that  movement  must  be  emphasized. 

Judgment  must  be  used  in  gi\dng  commands,  for  rarely  is  the 
cadence  of  two  movements  alike;  and  a  command  should  not  only 
indicate  the  cadence  of  an  exercise,  but  also  the  nature  of  its  exe- 
cution. 

Thus,  many  of  the  arm  exercises  are  short  and  snappy;  hence  the 
command  should  be  giA'en  in  a  smart  tone  of  voice,  and  the  interval 
between  the  commands  should  be  short. 

The  leg  exercises  can  not  be  executed  as  qidckly  as  those  of  the 
arms;  therefore,  the  commands  should  be  slightly  drawn  out  and 
follow  one  another  in  slow  succession. 

The  trunk  exercises,  o^dng  to  the  deliberateness  of  execution, 
should  be  considerably  drawn  out  and  follow  one  another  in  slow 
succession. 

The  antagonistic  exercises,  where  one  group  of  muscles  is  made  to 
antagonize  another,  tensing  exercises,  the  commands  are  drawn  still 
more.  In  these  exercises  words  are  preferable  to  numerals.  In 
fact  it  should  be  the  object  of  the  instructor  to  convey  to  the  men, 
by  the  manner  of  liis  command,  exactly  the  nature  of  the  exercise. 

All  commands  should  be  given  in  a  clear  and  distinct  tone  of 
voice,  articulation  should  be  distinct,  and  an  effort  should  be  made 
to  cultivate  a  voice  which  \\ill  inspire  the  men  with  enthusiasm 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


Id 


and  tend  to  make  them  execute  the  exercises  with  willingness,  snap, 
and  precision.  It  is  not  the  volume,  but  the  quality,  of  the  voice 
which  is  necessary  to  successful  instruction. 


Fig.  a. 


Fig.  B. 


THE  POSITION  OF  ATTENTION. 

This  is  the  position  an  unarmed  dismounted  soldier  assumes  when 
in  ranks.  During  the  setting-up  exercises,  it  is  assumed  whenever 
the  command  attention  is  given  by  the  instructor. 

Having  allowed  his  men  to  rest,  the  instructor  commands:   1. 
Squad,  2.  ATTENTION.     Figs.  A  and  B. 


20  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

The  words  class,  section,  or  company  may  be  substituted  for  the 
word  "squad." 

At  the  command  attention,  the  men  will  quickly  assume  and  retain 
the  following  position: 

Heels  on  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the  conformation  of 
the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  the  spine  extended  throughout  its 
entire  length. 

The  shoulders  falling  naturally,  are  forced  back  until  they  are 
square. 

Chest  arched  and  slightly  raised. 

The  arms  hang  naturally ;  thumbs  along  seams  of  trousers ;  back  of 
hands  out  and  elbows  turned  back. 

Head  erect,  chin  drawn  in  so  that  the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is 
vertical;  eyes  straight  to  the  front  and,  when  the  nature  of  the  terrain 
permits  it,  fixed  on  an  object  at  their  own  height. 

Too  much  attention  can  not  be  given  to  this  position,  and  instruc- 
tors are  cautioned  to  insist  that  the  men  accustom  themselves  to  it. 
As  a  rule,  it  is  so  exaggerated  that  it  not  only  becomes  ridiculous, 
but  positively  harmful.  The  men  must  be  taught  to  assume  a 
natural  and  graceful  position,  one  from  which  all  rigidity  is  elimi- 
nated and  from  which  action  is  possible  without  first  relaxing  muscles 
that  have  been  constrained  in  an  effort  to  maintain  the  position  of 
attention.  In  other  words,  coordination  rather  than  strength  should 
be  depended  upon. 

In  the  position  described  the  weight  rests  principally  upon  the 
balls  of  the  feet,  the  heels  resting  lightly  upon  the  ground. 

The  knees  are  extended  easily,  but  never  locked. 

The  body  is  now  inclined  forward  until  the  front  of  the  thighs  is 
directly  over  the  base  of  the  toes;  the  hips  are  square  and  the  waist 
is  extended  by  the  erection  of  the  entire  spine,  but  never  to  such  a 
degree  that  mobility  of  the  waist  is  lost. 


SETTING-TTP  EXERCISES.  21 

In  extending  the  spine,  the  chest  is  naturally  arched  and  the 
abdomen  is  drawn  in,  but  never  to  the  extent  where  it  interferes 
with  respiration. 

In  extending  the  spinal  column,  the  shoulders  must  not  be  raised, 
but  held  loosely  in  normal  position  and  forced  back  until  the  points 
of  the  shoulders  are  at  right  angles  with  an  anterior-posterior  plane 
running  through  the  body. 

The  chin  should  be  square;  i.  e.,  horizontal  and  forced  back  enough 
to  bring  the  neck  in  a  vertical  plane;  the  eyes^ixed  to  the  front  and 
the  object  on  which  they  are  fixed  must  be  at  their  own  height 
whenever  the  nature  of  the  terrain  permits  it. 

AMien  properly  assumed,  a  vertical  line  drawn  from  the  top  of  the 
head  should  pass  in  front  of  the  ear,  just  in  front  of  the  shoulder  and 
of  the  thigh,  and  find  its  base  at  the  balls  of  the  feet. 

All  muscles  should  be  contracted  only  enough  to  maintain  this 
position,  which  at  all  times  should  be  a  lithesome  one,  that  can  be 
maintained  for  a  long  period  without  fatigue — one  that  makes  for 
activity  and  that  is  based  upon  a  correct  anatomical  and  physico- 
logical  basis. 

Instructors  will  correct  the  position  of  attention  of  every  man 
individually  and  they  will  ascertain,  when  the  position  has  been 
properly  assumed,  whether  the  men  are  "on  their  toes, "  i.  e.,  carry- 
ing the  weight  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  whether  they  are  able  to  respire 
properly.  This  position  should  be  repeated  until  the  men  are 
able  to  assume  it  correctly  without  restraint  or  rigidity. 

At  the  command  rest  or  at  ease  the  men,  while  carrying  out  the 
provisions  of  the  drill  regulations,  should  be  cautioned  to  avoid 
assuming  any  position  that  has  a  tendency  to  nullify  the  object  of 
the  position  of  attention ;  as  standing  on  one  leg  for  instance ;  allow- 
ing the  shoulders  to  slope  forward ;  drooping  the  head ;  folding  arms 
across  chest,  etc.  The  weight  should  always  be  distributed  equally 
upon  both  legs;  the  head,  trimk,  and  shoulders  remain  erect  and  the 


22 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


arms  held  in  a  position  that  does  not  restrict  the  chest  or  derange 
the  shoulders.  The  positions  illustrated  here  have  been  found  most 
efficacious.     Fisrs.  C  and  D. 


Fig.  C. 


Fig.  D. 


FORMATIONS. 


The  men  form  in  a  single  or  double  rank,  the  tallest  men  on  the 
right. 
'      The  instructor  commands :  1.  Count  off. 

At  this  command,  all  except  the  right  file  execute  "eyes  right" 
and,  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank  count  1,  2,  3,  4: 
each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  as  he  counts. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  2B 

The  instructor  then  commands:  1,  Take  distance,  2.  MABCH, 
3.  SQUAD,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  No.  1  of  the  front  rank  moves  straight 
to  the  front;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  front  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  of 
the  rear  rank  in  the  order  named  move  straight  to  the  front,  each 
stepping  off,  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man  at  four  paces;  the 
command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their  distances. 

If  it  is  desired  that  a  less  distance  than  four  paces  be  taken,  the 
distance  desired  should  be  indicated  in  the  preparatory  command. 
The  men  of  the  squad  may  be  caused  to  cover  No.  1  front  rank  hy 
the  command  cover. 

The  instructor  then  commands:  1.  Right  (left),  2.  FACE,  3. 
COVER. 

At  these  commands  the  men  face  in  the  direction  indicated  andi 
cover  in  file. 

To  assemble  the  squad  the  instructor  commands:  1.  Right  (left)^ 
2.  FACE,  3.  assemble,  4.  MARCH. 

After  facing  and  at  command  march,  No.  1  of  the  front  rank 
stands  fast,  the  other  members  of  both  ranks  resiiming  their  original 
positions,  or  for  convenience  in  the  gymnasium  they  may  be  assem- 
bled to  the  rear,  in  which  case  the  assemblage  is  made  on  No.  4  of 
the  rear  rank. 

Unless  otherwise  indicated,  the  guide  is  always  right. 

SPECIAL  TRAINING. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  squad  or  class  work  instructors  should, 
when  they  notice  a  physical  defect  in  any  man,  recommend  some- 
exercise  which  will  tend  to  correct  it. 

The  most  common  physical  defects  and  corresponding  corrective^ 
exercises  are  noted  here . 

Dkooping  Head. 

Exercise  the  muscles  of  the  neck  by  bending,  turning,  and 
circlinji  the  head,  muscles  tense. 


24  MANTJAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

ROUND    AXD    STOOPED    SHOULDERS. 

Stretch  arms  sideward  from  front  horizontal,  turning  palmg 
upward,  muscles  tense. 

Swing  arms  forward  and  backward,  muscles  relaxed. 

Circle  arms  forward  and  backward  slowly,  energize  backward 
motion,  muscles  tense;  forward  motion  with  muscles  relaxed. 

Circle  shoulders  backward,  move  them  forward  first,  then  raise 
them;  then  move  them  backward  as  far  as  possible  in  the  raised 
position,  muscles  tense,  and  then  lower  to  normal  position,  muscles 
relaxed. 

"Weak  Back. 

Bend  trunk  forward  as  far  as  possible  and  erect  it  slowly. 
Bend  trunk  forward,  back  arched  and  head  thrown  back. 
Bend  trunk  sideward,  without  mo^•ing  hips   out   of  normal   posi- 
tion, right  and  left. 

Lie  on  floor,  face  down,  and  raise  head  and  shoulders. 

"Weak  Abdomex. 

Circle  trunk  right  or  left. 

Bend  trimk  backward  or  obliquely  backward. 

Bend  head  and  trunk  backward  without  moving  hips  out  of 
normal  plane. 

Lie  on  floor,  face  up,  and  raise  head  and  shoulders  slightly;  or 
to  sitting  position  or  raise  legs  slightly;  or  to  a  vertical  position. 

To  Increase  Depth  and  Width  of  Chest. 

Arm  stretchings,  sideward  and  upward,  muscles  tense. 

Same,  with  deep  inhalations. 

Arm  swings  and  arm  circles  outward,  away  from  the  body. 

Kaise  extended  arms  over  head  laterally  and  cross  them  l^ehind 
the  head. 

Breathing  exercises  in  connection  with  arm  and  shoulder  exer- 
cises. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 
STARTING  POSITIONS, 


25 


In  nearly  all  the  arm  exercises  it  is  necessary  to  hold  the  arms 
in  some  fixed  position  from  which  the  exercise  can  be  most  advanta- 
geously executed,  and  to  which  position  the  arms  are  again  returned. 


upon  completing  the  exercise.  These  positions  are  termed  starting 
positions;  and  though  it  may  not  be  absolutely  necessary  to  assume 
one  of  them  before  or  during  the  employment  of  any  other  portion 
of  the  body,  it  is  advisable  to  do  so,  since  they  give  to  the  exercise 
a  finished,  uniform,  and  graceful  appearance. 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


In  the  following  positions,  at  the  command  down,  resume  the 
attention.  Practice  in  assuming  the  starting  position  may  be  had 
by  repeating  the  commands  of  execution,  such  as  raise,  dozen. 

Intervals  ha^dng  been  taken  and  attention  assumed,  the  instructor 
commands : 


1.  1. 


Fig.  2. 

Arms  forward,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  1. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  arms  to  the  front  smartly, 
extended  to  tlieir  full  length,  till  the  hands  are  in  front  of 
and  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  palms  down,  fingers  ex- 
tended and  joined,  thumbs  under  index  fingers.  At  ARMS, 
DOWN,  resume  position  of  attention. 
Arms  sideward,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  2. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  arms  laterally  until  hori- 
zontal, palms  down,  fingers  as  in  1. 

The  arms  are  brought  down  smartly  without  allowing  them 
to  touch  the  body. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


27 


Arms  upward,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  3. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  arms  from  the  sides,  ex- 
tended to  their  full  length,  with  the  forward  movement, 
until  they  are  vertically  overhead,  back  of  hands  turned 
outward,  fingers  as  in  1. 


i-'lG.  3. 


Fig.  4. 


Tliis  position  may  also  be  assumed  by  raising  the  arma 
laterally    until    vertical.     The    instructor    cautions    which 
way  he  desires  it  done. 
Arms  backward,  2.  CROSS,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  4. 

At  the  command  cross,  the  arms  are  folded  across  the  back; 
hands  grasping  forearms. 


2S 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


5.  1.  Arms  to  tlirust,  2.  RAISE.  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  5. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  forearms  to  the  front  until 
horizontal,  elbow  forced  back,  upper  arms  against  the  chest, 
hands  tightly  closed,  knuckles  down. 


Fig.  .3.  Fig.  G. 

6.  1.  Hands  on  hips.  2.  PLACE,  3.  Arms.  4.  DOWN.     Fig.  6. 

At  the  command  place,  place  the  hands  on  the  liips,  the  finger 
tips  in  line  with  trouser  seams:  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
thumbs  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed  back. 

7.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWX.     Fig.  7. 

At  the  command  place,  raise  the  forearms  to  the  vertical 
positions,  palms  inward,  without  mo^ing  the  tipper  arms; 
then  raise  the  elbows  upward  and  outward  until  the  upper 
arms  are  horizontal;  at  the  same  time  bending  the  A\Tist  and 
allowing  the  finger  tips  to  rest  lightly  on  the  shotilders. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES. 


29 


8.  1.  Fingers  in  rear  of  head,  2.  LACE,  3.  Arms,  4.  DOWN.    Fig.  8. 
At  the  command  lace,  raise  the  arms  and  forearms  as  de- 
scribed in  7,  and  lace  the  fingers  beliind  the  lower  portion 
of  the  head,  elbows  well  ap  and  pressed  well  back. 


Fig. 


Fig 


These  positions  should  be  practiced  frequently,  and  instead  of 
recovering  the  position  of  attention  after  each  position,  the  instructor 
may  change  directly  from  one  to  another  by  gi^ing  the  proper  com- 
mands instead  of  commanding  arms,  down. 

For  instance :  To  change  from  the  position  described  in  paragraph  8 
to  that  described  in  paragraph  9  (haAing  commanded:  1.  Hands  on 
shoulders,  2.  PLACE),  he  commands:  1.  Hands  on  liips,  2.  PLACE. 

These  changes  should,  however,  be  made  only  after  the  positions 
are  thoroughly  understood  and  correctly  assumed. 


30  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 

As  has  been  stated  previously  (see  par.  2),  these  exercises  form  the 
basis  upon  which  the  entire  system  of  physical  training  in  the  service 
is  founded.  Therefore  too  much  importance  can  not  be  attached 
to  them.  Through  the  number  and  variety  of  movements  they 
offer  it  is  possible  to  develop  the  body  harmoniously  with  little  if  any 
danger  of  injurious  results.  They  deA'elop  the  muscles  and  impart 
vigor  and  tone  to  the  vital  organs  and  assist  them  in  their  functions; 
they  develop  endurance  and  are  important  factors  in  the  devel- 
opment of  smartness,  grace,  and  precision.  They  should  be  assidu- 
ously practiced,  and  the  fact  that  they  require  no  apparatus  of  any 
description  makes  it  possible  to  do  this  out  of  doors  or  even  in  the 
most  restricted  room,  proper  hygienic  conditions  being  the  only 
adjunct  upon  which  their  success  is  dependent.  Xo  physical 
training  drill  is  complete  without  them.  They  should  always 
precede  the  more  strenuous  forms  of  training,  as  they  prepare  the 
body  for  the  greater  exertion  these  forms  demand. 

The  following  series  prescribed  for  the  recruit  and  trained  soldier's 
instruction  is  indicated  here  to  illustrate  the  nature,  amount, 
and  arrangement  of  work  that  should  be  required  of  each  class.  At 
the  discretion  of  instructors  these  exercises  may  be  substituted  by 
others  of  a  similar  character.  Instructors  are  cautioned,  however, 
to  employ  all  the  parts  of  the  body  in  every  lesson  and  to  suit  the 
exercise  as  far  as  practicable  to  the  natural  function  of  the  particular 
part  of  the  body  which  they  employ. 

In  these  lessons  only  the  preparatory  command  is  given  here;  the 
command  of  execution,  which  is  invariably  Exercise,  and  the  com- 
mands of  continuance,  as  well  as  the  command  to  discontinue,  haA'ing 
been  explained  in  paragi-aph  6.  are  omitted. 

Every  preparatory  command  should  convey  a  definite  description 
of  the  exercise  required;  by  doing  so  long  explanations  are  avoided 
and  the  men  will  not  be  compelled  to  memorize  the  A'arious  move- 
ments. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


31 


RECRUIT  INSTRUCTION. 

First  Series. 
Position  of  attention,  from  at  ease  and  rest. 
Starting  positions,  Par.  10,  Figs.  1  to  8. 
1.  Paise  and  lower  arms  to  side  horizontal. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  2. 
The  arms  rigidly  extended  are  brought  to  the  sides  smartly 
without  coming  in  contact  with  the  thighs.     Inhale  on  first 
and  exhale  on  second  count. 


Fig.  9. 

Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Quarter  bend  trunk  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  9. 

The  trunk  is  inclined  forward  at  the  waist  about  45  degrees 
and  then  extended  again ;  the  hij^s  are  as  perpendicular  as  pos- 
sible; execute  slowly;  exhale  on  first  and  inhale  and  raise 
chest  on  second  count. 


32 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


6.  1.  Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Raise  shoulders. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  10. 

The  shoulders  are  raised  as  high  as  possible  without  dera  .. 
ing  the  position  of  the  body  or  head  and  lowered  back  t 
position;  execute  briskly;  inhaleonfirst  and  exhale  on  secon 
count. 


Fig.  10. 


6.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Quarter  bend  knees. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  11. 

The  knees  are  flexed  until  the  point  of  the  knee  is  directl 
over  the  toes;  whole  foot  remains  on  ground;  heels  clo3e( 
head  and  body  erect;  execute  moderately  fast,  emphasizii 
the  extension;  breathe  naturall v. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


33 


1.  Arms  backward,  2.  CROSS,  3.  Rise  on  toes. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  12. 

The  body  is  raised  smartly  until  the  toes  and  ankles  are 
extended  as  much  as  possible;  heels  closed;  head  and  trunk 
erect;  in  recovering  position  heels  are  lowered  gently:  breathe 
naturally. 


Fig.  12. 


1.  Breathing  exercise,  2.  INHALE,  3.  EXHALE. 

At  inhale  the  arms  are  stretched  forward  overhead  and  the 
lungs  are  inflated;  at  exhale  the  arms  are  lowered  laterally  and 
the  lungs  deflated;  execute  slowly;  repeat  four  times. 

31853°— 14— 3 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Second  Series. 
Position  of  attention,  as  in  first  series. 
Repeat  first  lesson . 

1.  Hands  on  slioiilders.  2.  PLACE,  3.  Extend  arms  forward. 
Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times. 

The  arms  are  extended  forward  forcibly,  palms  doA^Ti,  and 
brought  back  to  position  smartly,  elbows  being  forced  back; 
exhale  on  first  and  inhale  on  second  count. 


Fig. 13. 

4.  1.  Handsonliips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Bend  trunk  backward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  G  to  8  times,  Fig.  13. 

The  trunk  is  bent  backward  as  far  as  possible;  head  and 
shoulders  fixed;  knees  extended;  feet  firmly  on  the  ground; 
hips  as  nearly  perpendicular  as  possible;  in  recovering  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  sway  forward;  execute  slowly;  inhale 
on  first  and  exhale  on  second  count. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


35 


Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Move  shoulders  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  14. 

The  shoulders  are  relaxed  and  moved  forward  and  in  as  far 
as  possible  and  then  moved  backward  without  jerking;  head 
and  trunk  erect;  execute  slowly;  exhale  on  first  and  inhale 
on  second  count. 


Fig.  14. 


Fig.  15. 


6.  1.  Arms  backward,  2.  CROSS,  3.  Half  bend  knees. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  15. 

The  knees  are  separated  and  bent  halfway  to  the  ground, 
point  of  knee  being  forced  downward;  head  and  trunk  erect; 
execute  smartly  and  emphasize  the  extension;  breathe  natu- 
rallv. 


36 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TEAINING. 


'.  1.  Handson  liips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Half  bend  tnink  forward. 

Two  coimts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  IG. 

The  trunk  is  inclined  forward  until  it  is  at  right  angles  lo 
the  legs,  hips  perpendicular:  knees  extended:  head  and 
shoulders  fixed;  execute  moderately  slow:  exhale  on  fu'st  and 
inhale  and  raise  chest  on  second  count. 


Fig. 16. 


8.1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Strike  arms  sideward. 

The  arms,  knuckles  down,  hands  closed,  are  flung  outward 

forcibly  and  brought  back  to  shoulders  smartly;  execute  fast; 

breathe  naturally. 
9.  Breathins:  exercise,  as  in  first  le.-^son. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


37 


Third  Series. 

1.  Position  of  attention,  as  in  first  series. 

2.  Repeat  second  lesson. 

3.  1.  Raise  arms  overhead  laterally. 

Two  counts:  repeat  8  to  10  times,  as  in  Fig.  3. 

The  arms,  rigidly  extended  at  the  elbows,  are  raised  over- 
head, palms  inward,  smartly  and  brought  down  the  same  way; 
execute  moderately  fast;  inhale  on  the  first  and  exhale  on  the 
second  count. 


1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Bend  trunk  sideward,  right  or 
left. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  17. 
The  trunk,  stretched  at  the  waist,  is  inclined  sideward  aa 
far  as  possible;  head  and  shoulders  fixed;  knees  extended 
and  feet  firmly  on  the  ground;  execute  slowly;  inhale  on  first 
and  exhale  on  seco9( 


Tif(>640 


38 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


5.    1.  Arms  to  tlirust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Bend  head  forward  and  back- 
ward. 

Four  counts;  repeat  G  to  8  times.  Fig.  18. 
The  chin  is  drawn  in  and  the  ]iead  bent  forward,  back  mus- 
cles of  neck  being  stretched  upward;  shoulders  remain  fixed; 
in  recovering  the  muscles  are  relaxed;  execute  slowly;  inhale 
and  raise  chest  on  first  and  exhale  on  second  count.  In  bend- 
ing the  head  backward  the  muscles  of  the  neck  are  stretched 
upward;  breathe  as  before. 


Fig. is. 


Fig. 19. 


1.  Curl  shoulders  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  19. 

The  shoulders  relaxed  are  rolled  forward  as  far  as  possible, 
arms  being  rotated  forward;  they  are  then  rolled  backward 
and  the  arms  are  rotated  backward;  execute  slowly;  exhale 
on  first  and  inhale  on  second  count. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  39 

Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Full  bend  knees. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  20. 

The  knees  are  separated  and  bent  as  much  as  possible; 
point  of  knees  forced  forward  and  downward;  heels  together; 
trunk  and  head  erect;  execute  slowly;  breathe  naturally. 


Fig.  2u. 

8.  1.  Hands    in    rear    of   head,  2.    LACE,  3.  On  toes,  4.    RISE, 

5.  ROCK. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times. 

The  body  is  raised  on  toes  and  then  by  short  and  quick; 
extensions  and  flections  of  the  toes  it  is  lowered  and  raised 
kneeL  extended;  heels  together  and  free  from  the  ground; 
breathe  naturally, 

9.  Breathing  exercise  as  in  first  lesson. 


40 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Fourth  Serits. 

1.  Repeat  third  series. 

2.  1.  Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Thrust  arms  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  21. 

The  arms,  knuckles  up,  are  thrust  forward  forcibly;  in  re- 
covering the  elbows  are  forced  back;  execute  moderately  fast; 
exhale  on  first  and  inhale  on  the  second  count. 


Fia.  21.  Fig.  22. 

3.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Twist  trunk  sideward, 
right  or  left. 

Two  counts;  repeat  G  to  8  times,  Fig.  22. 

The  trunk  is  turned  to  the  right  or  left  as  far  as  possible; 
hips  as  nearly  perpendicular  as  possible;  shoulders  square  and 
head  erect;  knees  extended  and  feet  firm;  execute  slowly; 
inhale  on  first  and  exhale  on  second  count. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


41 


4.  1.  Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Turn  head  right,  or  left. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times.  Fig.  23. 

The  head,  chin  square,  is  turned  to  the  right,  or  left,  as  far 
as  possible,  muscles  of  the  neck  being  stretched;  shoulders 
remain  square;  execute  slowly;  breathe  naturally. 


Fig.  23. 


Fig.  24. 


1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Raise  knee. 

Two  counts;  repeat  10  to  12  times,  Fig.  24. 

The  thigh  and  knee  are  flexed  until  they  are  at  right  angles, 
thigh  horizontal;  toes  depressed;  the  right  knee  is  raised  at 
one  and  the  left  at  two;  trunk  and  head  erect;  execute  in  ca- 
dence of  quick  time;  breathe  naturally. 


42  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

6.  1.  Fingers  in  rear  of  head,  2.  LACE,  3.  Full  bend  tnmk  forward. 
FORWARD. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  25. 

The  trunk  is  bent  forward  as  far  as  possible;  knees  extended ; 
feet  firm;  head  and  shoulders  fixed;  execute  slowly;  exhale 
on  first  and  inhale  on  second  count. 


Fig.  25. 


7.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  On  toes,  4.  RISE,  5.  HOP. 

Two  counts;  repeat  12  to  16  times. 

The  body  is  raised  on  toes  and  the  hopping  is  performed 
with  knees  extended;  execute  fast;  breathe  naturally. 

8.  Breathing  exercise,  as  in  first  lesson. 


SETTING-TTP  EXERCISES. 


43 


Fifth  Series. 

1 .  Repeat  fourth  series. 

2.  1.  Arms  forward,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Stretch  arms  sideward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  26. 


Fig.  26. 

From  the  front  horizontal  the  arms  are  extended  to  their 
fullest  extent  and  then  stretched  sideward,  the  arms  rotating 
till  the  palms  are  up;  the  sideward  movement  is  performed 
slowly;  the  recovery  relaxed  and  quick;  inhale  on  first  and 
exhale  on  the  second  count. 


44 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


3.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Bend  trunk  obliquely  forward, 
right  or  left. 

Two  counts;  repeat  4  to  8  times.  Fig.  27. 

Th-e  trunk  is  turned  to  the  right  and  bent  forward  to  the 
half-bend  position;  shoulders  remain  square,  in  the  plane  of 
the  ground;  head  fixed;  knees  straight;  feet  firm;  hips  as 
nearly  perpendicular  as  possible;  execute  slowly;  exhale  on 
the  first  and  inhale  and  raise  chest  on  second  count. 


4.  1. 


Fig.  27. 


Fig.  28. 


Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Extend  leg  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.  Fig.  28. 

The  knee  and  ankle  are  extended  forward  with  a  snap,  the 
toes  just  escaping  the  ground;  all  extensor  muscles  con- 
tracted; in  recovering  relax ;  trunk  and  head  erect;  execute 
brisklv;  breathe  naturally. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


45 


1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Move  elbows  forward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times.     Fig.  29. 

The  elbows  are  brought  together  horizontally  in  front  and 
then  forced  back  as  far  as  possible;  the  forward  movement 
relaxed,  the  backward  a  stretch  not  a  jerk;  execute  moderately 
fast:  exhale  on  the  first  and  inhale  on  the  second  count. . 


Fig.  29. 


Hand  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  back- 
ward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times. 

Bend  trunk  forward  to  the  half-bend  position  (Fig.  16),  and 
then  backward  (Fig.  13);  execute  slowly;  exhale  on  first  and 
inhale  on  second  count. 


46 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


7.  1.  Arm?  backward,  2.  CROSS,  3.  Rise  on  toes,   right  and  left 
alternately. 

Four  counts;  repeat  10  to  12  time?.  Fig.  30. 


Fig. 30. 


The  body  is  extended  on  the  toes  of  the  right  foot  and  then 
on  those  of  the  left;  heels  closed;  trunk  and  head  erect;  exe- 
cute moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 
8.  Breathing:  exercise,  as  in  first  lesson. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  47 

Sixth  Series. 

1.  Repeat  fifth  series. 

2.  1.  Arms  forward  overhead,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Swing  arms  downward 

and  upward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  31. 


Fig.  31. 
Arms  sideward  overhead,   2.   RAISE,  3.  Fingers,  4.   LACE, 
5.  Bend  trunk  sideward,  right  and  left. 
Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  32. 
The  arms  are  fully  extended  and  the  body,  stretched  at 
the  waist,  is  bent  sideward  to  the  right  and  left;  knees  straight; 
feet  firm;  head  erect;  execute  slowly;  breathe  naturally. 


48  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

4.  1.  Knees  to  squatting  position,  hands  on  hips,  2.  BEXD, 
3,  Hock  on  knees. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times. 

The  knees  are  bent  as  in  Fig.  20;  extend  and  bend  the 
knees  in  quick  succession;  trunk  and  head  erect;  heels 
closed;  execute  moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 


Fig. 32. 

5.  1.  Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Move  shoulders  forward,  up, 
back,  and  down. 

Four  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times. 

The  shoulders  are  relaxed  and  brought  forward;  in  that 
position  they  are  raised;  then  they  are  forced  back  without 
lowering  them;  and  then  they  are  dropped  back  to  position; 
execute  slowly;  exhale  on  the  first;  inhale  on  the  second  and 
third  and  exhale  on  the  last  count. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


49 


6.  1.  Arms  to  thrust,  2.    RAISE,  3.    Thrust  arms  forward; 
them  sideward,  forward,  and  back  to  position. 
Four  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times. 


swing 


Fig. 33. 


The  arms  are  thrust  forward,  then  relaxed  and  swung  side- 
ward, then  forward  and  finally  brought  back  to  position, 
pressing  elbows  well  to  the  rear;  execute  moderately  fa^t; 
exhale  on  the  fir^t  and  third  and  inhale  on  the  second  and 
fourth  counts. 

31853'— 14 4 


50  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

7.  1.  Hop  to  side  straddle  and  swing  arms  over  head  laterally  and 

recover  position  of  attention. 

Two  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  33. 

The  distance  between  the  legs  is  about  30  inches;  in  alight- 
ing the  toes  come  in  contact  with  the  ground  first  and  knees 
are  bent  slightly;  trunk  and  head  erect;  arms  extended; 
execute  moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 

8.  Breathing  exercise,  a^  in  first  lesson. 


Fig. 34. 
TRAINED    SOLDIERS'    INSTRUCTION. 

First  Series. 
1.  1.  Stretch  arms  forward,  sideward,  forward  and  down. 
Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times. 

The  arms,   stretched  to  their  utmost,   are  raised  forward 
horizontallv,    then    moved    sideward,     knuckles    down;  in 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


51 


returning  and  lowering  the  arms  the  muscles  are  relaxed; 
trunk  and  head  erect;  execute  first  two  motions  slowly; 
second  two  moderately  fast;  inhale  on  first  and  second,  and 
exhale  on  third  and  fourth  counts. 

Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Half  bend  trunk  forward 
and  extend  arms  sideward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  34. 

The  trunk  is  bent  as  in  Fig.  16,  and  arms  are  extended 
forcibly;  in  the  recovery  the  elbows  are  forced  back  and  the 
chest  raised;  execute  slcw]y;  exhale  on  first,  inhale  on  second 
count. 


Fig.  35. 


3.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Full  bend  knees  and  extend 
arms  sideward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  35. 

The  knees  are  bent  as  in  Fig.  20,  and  arms  are  extended 
sideward  forcibly;  execute  moderately  slow;  breathe  naturally. 


52 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


4.  1.  Al•mt^  sideward,  2.  KAISE,  3.  Roll  shoulders  and  arms  for- 
ward and  back. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times,  Fig.  3>). 

The  arms  are  rotated  and  the  shoulders  rolled  forward  and 
backward  as  far  as  possible;  execute  slowly;  exliale  on  first 
and  inhale  and  raise  chest  on  second  count. 


Fig. 36. 

5.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders,    2.  PLACE,   3.  Twist    trunk   sideward 
right,  or  left,  and  extend  arms  sideward. 
Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  S  times,  Fig.  37. 
The  trunk  is  twisted  as  in  Fig.  22;  execute  moderately 
fast;  inhale  on  the  first  and  exhale  on  the  second  count. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


53 


6.  1.  Raise  arms  and  right  or  left  leg  forward,  move  arms  sideward 
and  leg  backward;  move  arms  and  leg  forward  and  recover. 

Four  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  38. 

On  the  first  count,  the  arms  and  legs  are  raised  forward^ 
arms  horizontal,  leg  extended;  toes  depressed;  foot  at  height 


Fig.  37. 


Fig. 38. 


of  knee;  on  the  second  count  the  arms  are  moved  smartly 
to  side  horizontal  and  the  leg  is  moved  backward,  knee  and 
toes  extended;  at  three  the  first  position  is  assumed  and  at/owr 
the  position  of  attention;  execute  moderately  fast;  inhale 
on  first  two  and  exhale  on  last  two  counts. 


54  LIANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

7.  1.  Forearms  vertically,  2.  RAISE,   3.  Extend  arms  upward  and 
raise  on  toes;  resume  vertical  position;  and  recover  position 
of  attention. 
Four  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  time?,  Fig.  39. 


Fig. 3y. 

The  forearms  are  raised  vertically  at  one\  at  two  they  are 
extended  upward  and  the  body  is  raised  on  toes;  at  three  the 
first  position  is  assumed,  and  2d,  four  the  position  of  attention; 
execute  briskly;  inhale  on  first  two  and  exhale  on  last  two 
counts. 
8.  Breathing  exercise. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  65 

Second  Series. 

1.  Repeat  first  series. 

2.  1.  Arms  to  thnist,   2.  RAISE,   3.  Thrust  arms  upward,   swing 

downward  and  backward,  swing  upward  and  recover. 
Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times,  Fig.  40. 


Fig.  40.  Fig.  41. 

The  arms  are  thrust  upward  forcibly  at  one;  at  two  the 
arms,  relaxed,  are  swung  downward  to  the  front  and  back 
as  far  as  possible;  at  three  they  are  swung  upward,  and  at/oitr 
the  position  of  attention  is  resumed;  trunk  and  head  erect; 
knees  extended;  execute  moderately  fast;  inhale  on  first 
three  and  exhale  on  last  count. 


66  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

3.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,,  3.  Bend  trunk  backward 
and  extend  arms  sideward,  knuckles  up. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  41. 

The  trunk  is  bent  backward  as  in  Fig.  13,  and  the  arras, 
knuckles  down,  are  extended  to  the  side  horizontal;  head 
fixed;  knees  extended;  feet  firm;  execute  slowly;  inhale  on 
first  and  exhale  on  second  count. 


Fig.  42. 

4.  1.  Full  bend  knees  and  raise  arms,  knuckles  down,  to  side  hori- 
zontal, 2.  BEND,  3.  Rock,  and  circle  arms  backward. 

Two  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times,  Fig.  42. 

The  knees,  bent  to  the  squatting  position,  are  slightly 
extended  and  flexed  as  in  Exercise  4,  Sixth  Lesson,  Recruit 
Instruction,  and  the  arms  are  circled  backward  in  circles  of 
about  12  inches;  head  and  trunk  erect;  arms  extended,-  exe- 
cute moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


67 


5.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Circle  trunk  right,  or  left. 

Six  counts;  repeat  4  to  6  times.  Fig.  43. 

The  trunk  is  half  bent  forward  at  one;  at  two  it  is  moved  to 
the  right  side  bend  position;  at  three  to  the  back  bend;  at 
four  to  the  left  bend ;  at  Jive  to  the  front  bend  position  and 
raised  at  six;  knees  extended;  feet  firm;  head  fixed;  execute 
slowly;  exhale  on  first;  inhale  on  second;  hold  breath  on 
third  and  fourth;  exhale  on  fifth  and  inhale  on  sixth  count. 


Fig. 43. 


Fig.  44. 


6.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Swing  right  and  left  leg  for- 
ward, breast  high,  and  extend  right  and  left  arm  forward 
horizontally,  alternating  right  and  left. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times.  Fig.  44. 

The  right  leg,  knee  extended,  is  swung  forward  high  enough 
to  come  in  contact  with  the  hand;  supporting  leg  extended; 
body  inclined  as  little  as  possible;  execute  moderately  fast; 
breathe  naturally. 


58 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


7.  1.  Leaning  rest  in  four  counts. 

Repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  45  a  and  h. 

At  one  knees  are  bent  to  squatting  position,  hands  on  the 
ground  between  knees;  at  two  the  legs  are  extended  back- 
ward to  the  leaning  rest;  at  three  the  first  position  is  resumed, 


i'lG.  40  a 


Fig.  45  6. 


and  at/our  the  position  of  attention;  hands  should  be  directly 
under  shoulders;  back  arched;  knees  straight;  head   fixed; 
execute  moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 
Breathing  exercise. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


59 


Third  Series. 


1.  Repeat  second  series. 

2.  1.  Stretch  arms  forward, 

and  down. 


sideward,  upward,  sideward,  forward, 


Six  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times. 

First  five  counts  arms  are  extended  as  much  as  possible;  in 
the  last  they  are  relaxed ;  execute  slowly;  inhale  on  first  three 
counts  and  exhale  on  last  three. 


Fig. 46. 


Half  bend  trunk  forward  and  rotate  arms  inward;  raise  and 
bend  trunk  backward,  raising  and  rotating  arms  backward, 
palms  up;  resume  first  position  and  recover. 

Four  counts;  repeat  4  to  8  times,  Fig.  46. 

In  the  first  position  the  body  and  arms  are  relaxed;  in  the 
second  the  body  and  arms  are  tense  (Fig.  41);  the  third  posi- 
tion is  the  same  as  the  first,  and  at  four  the  position  of  atten- 
tion is  resumed;  execute  slowly;  exhale  on  first  and  third  and 
inhale  on  second  and  fourth  counts. 


60  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

4.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE,  3,  Rise  on  toes,  bend  knees  to 
squatting  position;  extend  knees  and  recover. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times. 

The  body  is  raised  on  toes  slowly  at  oiu;  at  two  the  knees 
are  bent  slowly  to  squatting  position;  at  three  they  are  ex- 
tended slowly  and  at /owr  the  starting  position  is  resumed; 
execute  slowly;  breathe  naturally. 


Fig.  47.  Fig.  4S. 

5.  1.  Hop  to  side  straddle  position,  hands  on  hips,  bend  trunk  for 
ward  and  extend  arms  downward,  fingers  touching  ground; 
resume  straddle  ^vith  hands  on  hips  and  hop  to  attention. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  47. 

Execute  moderately  fast;  breathe  naturally. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


61 


Arms  to  thrust,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Thrust  arms  forward;  swing 
right,  (left)  arm  up,  left,  (right)  down;  swing  to  front  hori 
zontal  and  recover. 

Four  counts,  or  alternating  in  eight  counts;  repeat  8  to  10 
times.  Fig.  48. 

The  tlirust  and  recovery  are  forcible,  the  swings  brisk  but 
relaxed;  execute  moderately  fast;  exhale  on  first  and  third 
count  and  inhale  on  second  and  fourth. 


YiG.-i9b. 


Step  position  forward  right,  or  left,  and  raise  arms  to  front  hor- 
izontal; lunge  forward  and  swing  arms  to  side  horizontal;  re- 
sume first  position  and  recover  position  of  attention. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times,  Fig.  49  a  and  b. 

The  right  foot,  knee  extended  and  toes  depressed,  is  moved 
forward  once  its  length,  the  toes  resting  on  the  ground  lightly, 
the  weight  resting  on  the  left  leg,  and  the  arms  are  raised  to 


62 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


the  front  horizontal,  at  one:  at  two  the  right  foot  is  advanced 
and  planted  smartly,  the  distance  between  heels  being  about 
3-foot  lengths,  and  the  arms  are  swung  to  side  horizontal; 
rightkneeis  well  bent,  left  extended:  trunk  and  head  erect; 
at  three  the  first  position,  and  at /our  the  position  of  atten- 
tion are  restimed ;  execute  moderately  fast ;  exhale  on  first  and 
and  tliird  and  inhale  on-second  and  fourth  counts. 
8.  Breatliing  exercise. 


Fig.  50. 

Fourth  Series. 
Repeat  tliird  series. 

1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Extend  arms  upward; 
swing  arms  downward  laterally,  upward  laterally,  and  recover 
starting  position. 

Four  counts;  repeat  G  to  10  times. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES. 


63 


The  first  and  fourth  motions  are  energetic;  the  second  and 
tliird  relaxed;  execute  moderately  fast;  inhale  on  first  and 
third  counts  and  exhale  on  second  and  fourth. 
To  side  straddle  with  arms  overhead,  2.  Hop,  3.  Bend  trunk 
forward  and  back  and  swing  arms  downward  and  upward. 

Two  counts:  repeat  6  to  8  times.  Fig.  50. 


Fig.  51. 


Being  in  the  straddle  position,  the  body  is  bent  forward  as 
far  as  possible  and  the  arms  are  swung  between  the  legs;  the 
arms  are  then  swung  upward  and  the  body  bent  backward; 
knees  extended;  exec.ite  moderately  fast;  exhale  on  first  and 
inhale  on  second  count. 


64 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


4.  1.  .Vrmsto  tliriist,  2.  RAISE,  3.  Thrust  arms  sideward  and  lunge 
sideward  right  and  left  alternately. 

Four  counts;  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  51. 


Fig. 


The  starting  position  is  resumed  at  tuo  and /our;  the  dis- 
tance of  the  lunge  is  tliree  times  the  length  of  the  feet;  sup- 
porting leg  extended;  head  and  trunk  erect:  execute  moder- 
ately fast;  inhale  on  first  and  tliird  and  exhale  on  second  and 
fourth  counts. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES. 


65 


Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE,  3.  Bend  trunk  sideward  right 
and  extend  left  arm  obliquely  upward  and  right  obliquely 
downward;  swing  trunk  sideward  left  and  right  and  recover. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  8  times,  Fig.  52. 

The  trunk  is  bent  to  the  right,  the  left  arm,  palm  down,  is 
extended  obliquely  upward  and  the  right  arm  obliquely 
downward,  at  one;  at  two  the  body  is  bent  to  the  left;  at  three 
to  the  right  and  at  four  the  starting  position  is  resumed;  arms 
extended;  knees  straight;  head  fixed;  execute  moderately  fast; 
breathe  naturally. 


1 

^^^          JHBS 

w 

i^S*^^^ 

^f      i'-^^MI 

miA-..- 

. 

.^..^^^^■i 

Fig.  53. 


To  squatting  position,  hands  on  ground.  2.  BEND.  3.  Ex- 
tend right  and  left  legs  backward,  alternately. 

Four  counts;  repeat  6  to  10  times,  Fig.  53. 

The  squatting  position  is  the  starting  position,  from  there 
the  right  and  left  legs  are  extended  backward  and  brought 
back  to  the  squatting  position  again;  execute  moderately 
fast;  breathe  naturally. 

31853°- 14 5 


66  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TEAINING. 

7.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders.     2.  PLACE,  3.  Extend  arms  sideward 
and  sw-ing  right  and  left  legs  sideward,  alternately 
Four  counts:  repeat  8  to  10  times,  Fig.  54. 


Fig.  54. 


The  legs  are  extended  and  swung  loosely  to  the  side  as 
high  as  possible,  arms  being  extended  with  each  leg  move- 
ment; execute  moderately  fast;  inhale  on  one  and  three  and 
exhale  on  two  and  four. 
8.  Breathing  exercise. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  67 

Fifth  Series. 

This  series  is  composed  of  three  groups,  each  group  containing 
four  exercises,  and  together  they  form  a  combination  which  can  be 
adapted  to  music. 

Each  exercise  is  composed  of  four  movements  and  should  be 
repeated  four  times,  twice  to  the  right  and  twice  to  the  left,  alter- 
nately, except  the  last,  which  is  repeated  in  the  same  direction. 
The  third  position  always  corresponds  to  the  first,  and  the  fourth 
to  the  position  of  attention. 

When  performed  to  music  it  is  advisable  to  employ  "'two-four" 
time,  allowing  two  beats  to  every  movement,  or  four  measures  to 
an  exercise,  the  action  occurring  on  the  first  beat  and  a  pause  in 
position  during  the  second  beat.  If  this  is  done  and  the  tempo  is 
made  to  suit  the  movements,  it  will  be  possible  to  execute  the  exer- 
cises with  precision  and  ^igor,  and  slurring  a  movement  for  the  sake 
of  keeping  time  will  be  eliminated.  Every  group  should  be  pre- 
ceded by  an  introduction  of  four  measures. 


68 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


First  Group. 
First  Exercise. 


Flu.  .>j.  l-lL,.,3h 

Counts. 

1 — 2.  Raise  arms  overhead  laterally  and  step  position  forward  right. 
Fig.  55. 

3 — 1.  Lunge  forward  right  and  swing  the  arms  downward  and  back- 
ward laterally.     Fig.  56. 

5 — 6.  Resume  first  position. 

7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


Second  Exercise. 


Fig.  57.  Fig.  58. 

Counts. 
1—2.  Raise  right  arm  obliquely  upward  to  the  right,  and  left  arm 

o1)liquely  backward  to  the  left,  and  step  position  forward 

to  the  right  with  the  right  foot.     Fig.  57. 
3^.  Lunge  obliquely  forward  to  the  right  and  swing  right  arm 

downward  to  the  rear,  and  left  arm  obliquely  upward.  Fig.  58. 
5 — G.  Resume  first  position. 
7—8.  Resume  position  of  attention.  ' 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


70  MANTJAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Exercise. 


Fig. 59.  Fig.  60. 

iCounts. 

1 — 2.  Flex  arms  over  shoulders  with  lateral  motion,  knuckles  to  the 

rear,  hands  closed,  and  step  position  sideward  right.     Fig.  59. 
3 — 4.  Lunge  sideward  right  and  extend   arms   to  side  horizontal, 

knuckles  to  the  rear.    Fig.  60. 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position. 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


71 


fourth  Exercise. 


Fig. Gi.  Fig.  02. 

Counts. 
1 — 2.  Raise  anns  to  side  horizontal  and  step  position  backward  right. 

Fig.  61. 
'^ — 4.  Lunge   backward   right  and   raise   arms  overhead,   knuckles 

out.     Fig.  G2. 
5 — fi.  Resume  first  position. 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  loft,  right,  left. 


n 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Second  Groxjt. 
First  Exercise. 


Fig.  63. 
Counts. 

1 — 2.  Lunge  forward  right  and  raise  arms  to  side  horizontal.     Fig.  63. 
3—4.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  move  arms  downward.     Fig.  64. 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position. 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


73 


Fig.  64. 


74 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Second  Exercise. 


Counts. 

1 — 2.  Lunge  sideward  right  and  raise  right  arm  obliquely  upward, 

and  left  arm  obliquely  downward.     Fig.  65. 
3 — i.  Bend    trunk    sideward    right   and    swing   left   arm    upward, 

knuckles   out.    and   right  arm  downward  in  rear  of  body, 

knuckles  out.     Fig.  66. 
5 — (3.  Eesume  first  position. 
7 — S.  Eesume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES. 


76 


Fig.  66. 


76 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Exercise. 


Fig.  67. 
Counts. 
1 — 2.  Lunge  obliquely  forward  to  the  right,  and  raise  arms  overhead 

laterally.     Fig.  67. 
3 — 1.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  swing  amis  downiward  and  upward. 

Fig.  68. 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position . 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES. 


77 


Fig.  68, 


78 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fourth  Exercise. 


Fig.  69. 
Counts. 
1 — 2.  Lunge   backward   right   and    raise   amis   to   side   horizontal, 

knuckles  up.     Fig.  69. 
3 — 4.  Bend  trunk  and  head  backward   and  raise  arms  overhead 

palms  in.  Fig.  70. 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position. 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


79 


Fig.  70. 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Third  Group. 
First  Exercise. 


C!ounts. 
1—2. 

3—4. 

5^-6. 

7—8. 


Fig.  71. 

Stride  forward  right  and  flex  arms  over  shoulders  laterally, 

hands  closed,  knuckles  up.     Fig.  71. 
Face  to  the  left  on  both  heels,  bending  knees  and  striking 

arms  sideward,  knuckles  down.     Fig.  72. 
Resume  first  position. 
Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


Fig. 72. 


31853°— 14 G 


92 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Second  Exercise. 


Counts. 
1—2. 

3—1. 

5—6. 

7—8. 


Fig. 73. 

Stride  sideward  right  and  raise  and  circle  arms  outward,  cross- 
ing them  below.     Fig.  73. 

Bend  right  knee  and  trunk  obliquely  forward,  clasp  thigh 
with  arms.     Fig.  74. 

Resume  first  position. 

Resume  position  of  attention. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UF  EXERCISES. 


88 


Fig.  74. 


84 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Exercise. 


Counts. 

1 — 2.  Stride   backward  right,   and  raise  arms  overhead  laterally, 

palms  in.     Fig.  75. 
3 — i.  Turn  about  on  both  heels,  bend  left  knee  and  trunk  backward 

and  lower  arms  to  side  horizontal,  palms  up.     Fig.  76. 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position. 
7 — 8.  Resume  position  of  attention. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES. 


86 


Fourth  Exercise. 


YlG. 


Counts. 
1—2. 


Bend  to  the  squatting  position,  hands  on  the  ground.     Same 

as  Fig.  45a. 
Extend  to  the  leaning-rest  with  legs  straddled.     Fig.  77. 
Resume  first  position. 
Resume  position  of  attention. 
Repeat  four  times. 
Note. — Length  of  stride  in  these  exercises  should  be  28  inches 
between  heels. 


3-^. 
5—6. 

7—8. 


86  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

HOPPING  EXERCISES. 

Hopping  is  executed  by  raising  the  body  on  the  balls  of  the  feet 
and  forcing  the  body  from  the  ground  by  a  series  of  quick  exten- 
sions of  the  toe  and  ankle  joints;  knees  remain  easily  extended, 
heels  together  and  free  from  the  floor. 

Having  assumed  a  position  for  the  arms,  the  instructor  commands: 

I.  On  toes.     2.  RISE.     3.  HOP. 

At  the  command  hop,  execute  one  spring,  alighting  on  the  balls  of 
the  feet.     Continue  by  repeating  one,  two. 

1.  Hop  and  turn  to  the  right  or  left  at  every  second,  fourth,  or  sixth 

hop. 

2.  Hop  and  turn  about  at  every  second,  fourth,  or  sixth  hop. 

3.  Hop  to  side  straddle  in  four  and  return  to  attention  in  four  hops. 

4.  Hop  to  side  straddle  and  continue  to  hop  in  that  position. 

5.  Hop  to  side  straddle  in  one  hop  and  return  to  attention  in  next 

hop. 

6.  Hop  to  cross  straddle  and  return  to  attention  in  next  hop. 

7.  Hop  on  right  leg  and  extend  leg  left  forward,  sideward,  or 

backward. 

8.  Hop  on  left  leg  and  extend  right  forward,  sideward,  or  back- 

ward. 

9.  Hop  four  times  on  right  leg.  and  then  change  and  hop  four  times 

on  left  leg,  extending  the  unemployed  leg  forward,  sideward, 
or  backward. 
10.  Same  as  in  9,  hopping  twice  on  each  leg. 

II.  Same  as  in  9,  hopping  once  on  each  leg. 
12.  Hop  forward,  sideward,  or  backward. 

LEAPING. 

Leaping  or  jumping  as  a  setting-up  exercise  has  for  its  object  the 
raising  of  the  body  from  8  to  12  inches  from  the  ground,  there  is, 
however,  no  gaining  of  ground  as  in  gymnastic  or  athletic  jumping. 

At  the  first  command,  the  arms  are  raised  to  the  front  horizontal 
and  the  body  is  elevated  on  the  toes.     {See  Fig.  1,  Jumping.) 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  87 

At  the  command  leap,  the  arms  are  swung  downward  and  back- 
ward and  the  knees  are  slightly  bent  (see  Fig.  2,  Jumping);  without 
pausing  the  arms  are  swung  forward  again  and  as  they  pass  through 
the  vertical  plane  the  knees  are  extended  and  the  body  is  forced 
from  the  floor. 

The  moment  the  feet  leave  the  floor  the  knees  are  extended;  feet 
are  closed  and  toes  depressed;  the  arms  are  in  the  front  horizontal; 
the  back  is  arched  and  the  head  is  erect.     (See  Fig.  3,  Jumping.) 

In  alighting,  the  balls  of  the  feet  touch  the  floor  first,  knees  slightly 
bent;  the  latter  are  quickly  extended,  however,  and  the  arms 
brought  down  by  the  sides  and  the  position  of  attention  is  assumed. 

Continue  by  repeating  leap. 

LEAPING  EXERCISES. 

1.  Leap  and  execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right  or  left. 

2.  Leap  and  execute  a  half  turn  to  the  right  or  left. 

3.  Leap  and  straddle  legs  sideward  (legs  are  closed)  before  alighting. 

4.  Leap  and  cross  straddle,  right  or  left  leg  forward. 

5.  Leap  and  cross  legs,  right  over  left  or  left  over  right. 

6.  Leap  and  raise  heels. 

7.  Leap  and  raise  knees. 

8.  Leap  and  strike  feet  together. 

9.  Leap  and  strike  feet  together  twice. 

10.  Leap  and  strike  feet  together  three  times. 

11.  Leap  and  cross  and  recross  legs. 

12.  Leap  and  raise  heels  and  touch  them  with  hands. 

13.  Leap  and  swing  arms  sideward. 

14.  Leap  and  swing  arms  upward. 

15.  Leap  and  circle  arms  forward. 

16.  Leap  and  circle  arms  backward. 

17.  Leap  and  circle  arms  inward. 

18.  Leap  and  circle  arms  outward. 

19.  Leap  and  swing  arms  upward  and  execute  a  whole  turn. 


88  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

WALKING  AND  MARCHING. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches,  measured 
from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  120  steps  per 
minute. 

Proper  posture  and  carriage  have  ever  been  considered  very  im- 
portant in  the  training  of  soldiers.  In  marching,  the  head  and  trunk 
should  remain  immobile,  but  without  stiffness;  as  the  left  foot  is 
carried  forward  the  right  forearm  is  swung  forward  and  inward 
obliquely  across  the  body  until  the  thumb,  knuckles  being  turned 
out,  reaches  a  point  about  the  height  of  the  belt  plate.  The  upper 
arm  does  not  move  beyond  the  perpendicular  plane  while  the  fore- 
arm is  swung  forward,  though  the  arm  hangs  loosely  from  the  shoulder 
joint.  The  forearm  swing  ends  precisely  at  the  moment  the  left 
heel  strikes  the  ground;  the  arm  is  then  relaxed  and  allowed  to  swing 
down  and  backward  by  its  own  weight  until  it  reaches  a  point  where 
the  thumb  is  about  the  breadth  of  a  hand  to  the  rear  of  the  buttocks. 
As  the  right  arm  swings  back,  the  left  arm  is  swung  forward  with  the 
right  leg.  The  forward  motion  of  the  arm  assists  the  body  in  march- 
ing by  throwing  the  weight  forward  and  inward  upon  the  opposite 
foot  as  it  is  planted.  The  head  is  held  erect;  body  well  stretched 
from  the  waist;  chest  arched,  and  there  should  be  no  rotary  motion 
of  the  body  about  the  spine. 

As  the  leg  is  thrown  forward  the  knee  is  smartly  extended,  the 
heel  striking  the  ground  first. 

The  instructor  having  explained  the  principles  and  illustrated  the 
step  and  arm  swing,  commands:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH — and  to 
halt  the  squad  he  commands:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 

In  executing  the  setting-up  exercises  on  the  march  the  cadence 
should  at  first  be  given  slowly  and  gradually  increased  as  the  men 
become  more  expert;  as  some  exercises  require  a  slow  and  others  a 
faster  pace,  it  is  best  in  these  cases  to  allow  the  cadence  of  the 
exercise  to  determine  the  cadence  of  the  step. 


SETTING-TJP  EXEKCISES.  89 

The  men  should  march  in  a  single  file  at  proved  intervals.  The 
command  that  causes  and  discontinues  the  execution  should  be 
given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

On  the  march,  to  discontinue  the  exercise,  command:  1.  Quick 
time,  2.  MARCH,  instead  of  HALT,  as  when  standing. 

All  of  the  arm,  wrist,  finger,  and  shoulder  exercises,  and  some  of 
the  trunk  and  neck,  may  be  executed  on  the  march  by  the  same 
commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  when  standing. 

The  following  leg  and  foot  exercises  are  executed  at  the  command 
march;  the  execution  always  beginning  with  the  left  leg  or  foot. 

1.  1.  On  toes,  2.  MARCH. 

2.  1.  On  heels,  2.  MARCH. 

3.  1.  On  right  heel  and  left  toe,  2.  MARCH. 

4.  1.  On  left  heel  and  right  toe,  2.  MARCH. 

5.  1.  On  toes  with  knees  extended,  2.  MARCH. 

6.  1.  Swing  extended  leg  forward,  ankle  high,  2.  MARCH. 

7.  1.  Swing  extended  leg  forward,  knee  high,  2.  MARCH. 

8.  1.  S^ing  extended  leg  forward,  waist  high,  2.  MARCH. 

9.  1.  Swing  extended  leg  forward,  shoulder  high,  2.  MARCH. 

10.  1.  Raise  heels,  2.  MARCH. 

11.  1.  Raise  knees,  thigh  horizontal,  2.  MARCH. 

12.  1.  Raise  knees,  chest  high,  2.  MARCH. 

13.  1.  Circle  extended  leg  forward,  ankle  high,  2.  MARCH. 

14.  1.  Circle  extended  leg  forward,  knee  high,  2.  MARCH. 

15.  1.  Circle  extended  leg  forward,  waist  high,  2.  MARCH. 

16.  1.  Swing  extended  leg  backward,  2.  MARCH. 

17.  1.  Swing  extended  leg  sideward,  2.  MARCH. 

18.  1.  Raise  knee  and  extend  leg  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

19.  1.  Raise  heels  and  extend  leg  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

Steps. 

In  the  steps,  the  rules  given  above  apply,  viz,  the  command  march 
given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground,  determines  the  execution, 
which  always  begins  with  the  left  foot,  and  is  continued  until  the 


90  MANUAL  OF  FHTSICAI  TRAINING. 

command:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH,  is  given,  when  the  direct 
step  is  resumed. 

The  different  steps  are  executed  at  the  following  commands: 
1.  Cross  step,  2.  MARCH. 

As  the  legs  move  forward  they  are  crossed.    The  body  does 
not  turn. 
1.  Halting  step,  2.  AL\RCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced  and  planted;    the  right  foot  is 
brought  directly  in  rear  of  the  left,  resting  on  the  ball  only; 
the  right  is  then  advanced  and  planted  and  the  left  brought 
up,  and  so  on. 
1.  Foot-balancing  step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced   and  planted;  the  right  foot  is 
brought  up  beside  it,  heels  touching;  the  body  is  then  raised 
on  the  toes  and  lowered.     The  right  foot  is  then  advanced  and 
planted  and  the  left  brought  up.  and  so  on. 
1.  Continuous  change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced  and  planted;  the  toes  of  the  right 
are  then  advanced  near  the  heel  of  the  left  in  the  halting  step; 
the  left  foot  is  then  advanced  about  half  a  step  (15  inches) 
and  the  right  foot  is  advanced  with  the  full  step  and  planted; 
the  toes  of  the  left  foot  are  then  brought  up  to  the  heel  of  the 
right  foot,  which  advances  a  half  step,  when  the  left  foot  is 
advanced  a  full  step,  and  so  on. 
1.  Knee-rocking  step,  2.  MARCH. 

As  each  foot  is  planted  it  is  accompanied  by  a  slight  bend- 
ing and  extension  in  the  corresponding  knee;   the  other  leg 
remaining  fully  extended,  heel  raised. 
1.  Lunging  step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  length  of  the  step  is  45  inches,  the  knee  in  advance 
being  well  bent;  the  other  leg  remaining  fully  extended,  heel 
raised;  tnmk  erect. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  91 

1,  Leg-balance^step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced,  ankle  high;  it  is  then  swung 
backward  and  forward  and  planted,  the  body  during  the 
swing  balancing  on  the  right  leg.  The  right  foot  is  then 
advanced,  swung  backward  and  forward  and  planted,  and 
so  on. 
1.  Body-balance  step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced,  ankle  high,  body  being  bent 
slightly  to  the  rear;  the  left  foot  is  then  swung  backward, 
body  being  bent  slightly  to  the  front;  the  same  foot  is  then 
swung  forward  again  and  planted,  the  body  in  the  meantime 
becoming  erect.  This  is  repeated  with  the  right  foot,  and 
so  on. 
1.  Heel-and-toe  step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced  and  allowed  to  rest  on  the  heel; 
it  is  then  swung  backward  and  allowed  to  rest  on  the  toes; 
it  is  once  more  advanced  and  planted.     This  is  repeated  with 
the  right  foot,  and  so  on. 
1.  Cross  step,  raising  knees,  2.  MARCH. 

Execute  the  cross  step  and  raise  the  knees.  The  cross  step 
may  also  be  executed  in  combination  with  the  swings  of  the 
extended  leg. 

The  change  step  may  be  combined  with  the  following: 

Cross  step,  halting  step,  raising  knees,  foot-rocking  step,  on 

toes,  raising  heels,  swinging  and  circling  legs,  heel  and  toe 

step.     These  may  also  be  combined  with  the  change  step  hop. 

1.  Continuous  change  step  hop,  2.  MARCH. 

Execute  the  ordinary  change  step,  hopping  with  the  change. 
1.  Forward  gallop  hop,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced  and  planted,  the  right  is  brought 
up  in  rear  as  in  the  halting  step;  this  is  done  four  times  in 
succession.  The  same  is  done  four  times  with  the  right  foot 
in  advance,  and  so  on. 


92  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

1.  Sideward  gallop  hop,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  foot  is  advanced,  body  turning  on  the  right;  four 
hops  are  then  executed  sideward  on  the  left  foot  followed  by 
the  right;  at  the  fourth  hop  the  body  is  turned  to  the  left 
about  and  four  hops  executed  sideward  on  the  right  foot  fol- 
lowed by  the  left,  and  so  on. 

DOUBLE   TIMING. 

The  length  of  the  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches;  the  cadence 
is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute.  To  march  in  double  time  the 
instructor  commands:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg.  At  the  command  March  raise  the  forearms,  fingers  closed, 
to  a  horizontal  position  along  the  waist  line;  take  up  an  easy  run 
with  the  step  and  cadence  of  double  time,  allowing  a  natural  swing- 
ing motion  to  the  arms  inward  and  upward  in  the  direction  of  the 
opposite  shoulder. 

In  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command,  double  time,  march, 
given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick 
time,  and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

When  marching  in  double  time  and  in  running  the  men  breathe 
as  much  as  possible  through  the  nostrils,  keeping  the  mouth  closed. 

A  few  minutes  at  the  beginning  of  the  setting-up  exercises  should 
be  devoted  to  double  timing.  From  lasting  only  a  few  minutes  at 
the  start  it  may  be  gradually  increased,  so  that  daily  drills  should 
enable  the  men  at  the  end  of  five  or  six  months  to  double  time  for 
10  or  15  minutes  without  becoming  fatigued  or  distressed. 

After  the  double  time  the  men  should  be  marched  for  several  min- 
utes at  quick  time;  after  this  the  instructor  should  command: 
1.  Route  step,  2.  MARCH. 

In  marching  at  route  step,  the  men  are  not  required  to 
preserve  silence  nor  keep  the  step;  if  marching  at  proved  in- 
tervals, the  latter  is  preserved. 

To  resume  the  cadence  step  in  quick  time,  the  instructor 
commands:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 


SETTING-TJP  EXERCISES.  93 

Great  care  must  be  exercised  concerning  the  duration  of  the 
double  time  and  the  speed  and  duration  of  the  loin.  The  demands 
made  upon  the  men  should  be  increased  gradually. 

WTien  exercise  rather  than  distance  is  desired,  the  running  should 
be  done  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  heels  raised  from  the  ground. 

DOUBLE-TIMING  EXERCISES. 

\Miile  the  men  are  double  timing  the  instructor  may  vary  the 
position  of  the  arms  by  commanding: 

1.  1.  Arms  forward,  2.  RAISE. 

2.  1.  Arms  sideward,  2.  RAISE. 

3.  1.  Arms  upward,  2.  RAISE. 

4.  1.  Hands  on  hips,  2.  PLACE. 

5.  1.  Hands  on  shoulders,  2.  PLACE. 

6.  1.  Arms  forward,  2.  CROSS. 

7.  1.  Arms  backward,  2.  CROSS. 

At  the  command  Arms,  Down,  the  double-time  position 
for  the  arms  and  hands  is  resumed. 

The  instructor  may  combine  the  following  with  the  double 
time: 

1.  1.  Cross  step,  2.  MAR€H. 

2.  1.  Raise  knees,  2.  MARCH. 

3.  1.  Raise  heels,  2.  MARCH. 

4.  1.  Swing  legs  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

5.  1.  Swings  legs  backward,  2.  MARCH. 

To  continue  these  exercises,  but  still  continue  the  double  timing, 
command:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH.  To  march  in  quick  time, 
command:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH.  Marching  in  quick  or 
double  time,  to  halt,  command:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 


DUMB-BELLS. 


These  exercises  are  similar  in  every  way  to  the  setting-up  exer- 
cises, in  fact  all  of  the  latter  may  be  performed  with  the  dumb-bells. 
The  object  of  these  exercises  is,  therefore,  the  same  as  that  of  the 
setting-up  exercises,  except  that  the  weight  of  the  dumb-bells  neces- 
sitates a  greater  expenditure  of  muscular  energy,  chiefly  on  the  part 
of  the  muscles  of  the  arms,  shoulders,  and  upper  back  and  chest. 

It  is  advisable  that  light,  wooden  dumb-bells  weighing  from  2  to  2^ 
pounds  be  used,  as  the  amount  of  additional  exertion  this  weight 
calls  for  is  sufficient  for  the  purpose  of  muscular  development  with- 
out detracting  from  the  activity  and  suppleness  with  which  an  exer- 
cise may  be  performed. 

Dumb-bell  exercises  should  be  restricted  to  those  who  have  been 
thoroughly  drilled  in  the  setting-up  exercises. 

For  the  sake  of  uniformity  the  dumb-bells  will,  unless  otherwise 
specified,  be  held  as  follows:  In  all  positions  in  which  the  arms 
assume  a  horizontal  position  the  dumb-bells  are  vertical,  and  when 
the  arms  are  in  a  vertical  plane  the  plane  of  the  bells  is  horizontal. 
The  grip  on  the  bells  should,  as  a  rule,  always  be  firm. 

The  following  is  a  series  of  dumb-bell  exercises  arranged  progress- 
ively in  lessons  in  order  to  illustrate  the  method  of  instruction  for 
the  benefit  of  instructors.  The  numerals  in  brackets  are  the  counts 
on  which  that  part  of  an  exercise  that  precedes  them  is  performed. 

Whenever  the  word  "recover"  is  used  it  signifies  a  return  to  the 

starting  position. 

»5 


96 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

First  Series. 


Attention;  at  this  command,  the  position  of  attention  is  assumed 
with  bells  hanging  by  the  sides  of  the  body,  knuckles  out. 


Fig.  1. 
From  front  horizontal  position. 

1.  Swing  bells  downward  (1)  and  forward  (2). 

2.  Swing  bells  sideward  (1)  and  forward  (2). 

From  bells  to  thrust  position. 

3.  Half  bend  trunk  forward  and  thrust  bells  downward  (1)  Fig,  1: 

recover  starting  position  (2). 


DUMB-BELLS.  97 

From  attention. 
4.  Half  bend  knees  and  raise  bells  to  side  horizontal  (1);  recover  (2). 


Fig.  2. 
From  hells  to  thrust  position. 

5.  Thrust  bells  upward  and  bend  trunk  backward  (1)  Fig.  2;  recover 

(2). 

From  attention. 

6.  Rise  on  toes  and  raise  bells  overhead  forward  (1);  recover  (2). 

smv.^o— 14 — 7 


98  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

From  front  liorizontal. 

7.  Bend  trunk  side  war  da  lid  move  bells  sideward  (1)  Fig.  3,  recover 
(2).     Alternate  right  and  left. 


Fig. 3. 

From  attention. 
Swing  bells  upward  (1)  and  downward  to  the  rear  (2). 


DUMB-BELLS.  99 

Second  Series. 
From  right  bell  eitended  overhead. 

1.  Swing  right  bell  downward  and  left  upward  (1);  left  downward 
and  right  upward  (2). 


Fig.  4. 
From  bells  on  shoulders. 


2.  Strike  bells  sideward,  knuckles  down,  and  full  bend  knees  (1) 
Fig.  4;  recover  (2). 


100 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

From  front  horizontal . 


3.  Swing  bells  downward  and  backward  and  half  bend  trunk  for- 
ward (1)  Fig.  5;  recover  (2). 


Fig.  5. 


From  attention. 


4.  Swing  bells  over  head  forward  and  raise  right  leg  backward  (1); 
recover  (2);  repeat  with  left  leg,  or  alternate  legs,  and  count 
four. 


DTJMB-BELLS. 

From  thrust  'position. 


101 


Thrust  left  bell  upward,  right  downward,  and  bend  trunk  side- 
ward right  (1);  recover  (2);  repeat  to  the  left,  or  alternate, 
and  count  four. 


Fig.  6. 

6.  Thrust  bells  sideward  and  lunge  forward  right  (1)  Fig.  6;  recover 
(2);  repeat  to  the  left,  or  alternate. 


102 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

From  hells  on  hips. 


7,  Extend  bells  sideward  and  bend  trunk  backward  (1)  Fig.  7; 
recover  (2). 


Fig.  7. 

From  attention. 

Swing  bells  overhead  and  down  laterally;  upward  (1);  down- 
ward (2). 


DUMB-BELLS.  103 

Third  Series. 

From  thrust  -position. 

1.  Thrust  bells  forward  (1);  swiiig  sideward  (2);  swing  forward  (3); 
and  recover  (4). 


Fig.  8. 
From  front  horizontal. 

2.  Swing  bells  downward  and  bend  trunk  forward  (1);  swing  bells 
forward  and  upward  and  bend  trunk  backward  (2).  Contin- 
uous motion. 


104 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 
From  attention . 


3.  Raise  bells  to  side  horizontal  and  raise  right  leg  sideward  (1); 
recover  (2);  repeat  left,  or  alternate  in  four  counts. 


'mt^^' 


Fig.  9. 


From  thrust  position. 

4.  Twist  trunk  to  the  right  and  thrust  bells  sideward  (1),  Fig.  8; 

recover  (2);  repeat  to  the  left,  or  alternate  in  four  counts. 

5.  Thrust  bells  sideward  and  full  bend  knees  (1);  recover  (2). 


DUMB-BELLS.  105 

From  side  straddle  position,  bells  in  side  horizontal. 
6.  Bend  trunk  sideward  right  (1);  and  left  (2);  or  in  four  counts. 


Fig. 10. 
From  attention. 

7.  Swing  bells  overhead  laterally  and  lunge  sideward  right  (1),  Fig. 

9;  recover  (2);  repeat  left,  or  alternate  in  four  counts. 

From  attention. 

8.  Raise  bells  to  side  horizontal  and  hop  to  side  straddle  (1),  Fig. 

10:  recover  (2). 


106  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Fourth  Series. 
From  attention. 

1.  Stretch  bells  fonvard  (1);  stretch  sideward  (2);  stretch  forward 

(3);  recover  (4). 

From  attention. 

2.  Raise  bells  to  front  horizontal  and  stej)  position  forward  right 

(1);  lunge  forward  right  and  move  arms  to  side  horizontal 
(2);  third  position  same  as  the  first  (3);  recover  (4);  repeat 
left,  or  alternate  right  and  left  in  eight  counts. 

From  side  straddle,  hells  to  thrust. 

3.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  thrust  bells  to  the  floor  (1);  recover  (2); 

bend  trunk  backward  and  thrust  bells  sideward  (3);  recover 
(4). 

From  front  horizontal. 

A.  Twist  trunk  to  the  right  and  swing  arms  sideward  (1);  recover 
(2);  repeat  to  the  left,  or  alternate  in  four  counts. 

From  attention. 

5.  Bend  knees  to  the  squatting  position  and  place  bells  on  the 

floor  between  the  feet  (1);  extend  legs  backward  to  leaning 
rest  (2);  recover  squatting  position  (3);  recover  attention  (4). 

From  front  horizontal. 

6.  Move  bells  sideward,  turning  thumbs  down,  and  half  bend  knees 

(1),  Fig.  11;  raise  bells  overhead  and  extend  knees  (2);  re- 
sume side  horizontal  with  knees  bent  (3);  recover  (4). 


DUMB-BELLS. 


107 


Fig.  11. 


lOS  LIANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

From  bells  on  hips. 

7.  Lunge  obliquely  forward  right  and  place  bells  on  either  side  of 
feet  (1);  recover  (2);  repeat  to  the  left,  or  alternate. 


Fig.  12. 


From  side  straddle,  bells  overhead. 

S.  Twist  trunk  to  the  right  and  lower  bells  to  side  horizontal  (1) 
Fig.  12;  raise  bells  and  twist  trunk  forward  (2);  repeat  to  the 
left,  or  alternate  in  four  counts. 


DUMB-BELLS.  109 

Fifth  Series. 

From  attention. 

1.  Stretch  bells  to  side  horizontal  (1);  stretch  overhead  and  rise  on 
toes  (2);  lower  to  side  horizontal, 
heels  (3);  lower  arms  to  sides  (4). 


Fig. 13. 
From  side  straddle.,  hells  overhead. 

2.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  swin^  bells  between  legs  (1)  Fig.  13; 
recover  (2);  bend  trunk  obliquely  forward  to  the  right  and 
swing  bells  downward  and  upward  on  either  side  of  body  (3); 
recover  (4);  bend  obliquely  to  the  left,  arms  as  in  3  (5);  re- 
cover (6). 


no  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

From  attention. 

3.  Hop  to  side  straddle  and  raise  bells  to  side  horizontal  (1);  bend 
trunk  forward  and  clasp  right  thigh  with  arms,  right  knee 
bent,  left  extended,  (2)  Fig.  14;  recover  position  described 
under  1  (3);  and  recover  attention  (4).  Repeat,  alternating 
right  and  left. 


Fig. 14. 


Lunge  sideward  right  and  raise  bells  to  side  horizontal  (1);  bend 
trunk  sideward  right  and  swing  left  bell  upward  and  right 
downward  behind  body  (2);  same  position  as  in  1  (3);  recover 
attention  (4).     Repeat,  alternating  on  right  and  left. 


DUMB-BELLS.  Ill 

5.  Bend  knees  to  squatting  position  and  place  bells  on  floor  between 

feet  (1);  extend  legs  backward  to  leaning-rest  (2);  turn  to  the 
left  about  and  assume  the  sitting  position  (3) ;  turn  right  about 
and  return  to  leaning-rest  (4);  to  the  squatting  position  (5); 
and  recover  attention  (6).  Repeat,  alternating,  turn  to  the 
right  and  left. 

6.  Hop  to  the  side  straddle  position,  arms  stretched  in  side  horizon- 

tal (1);  twist  trunk  to  the  left  (2);  to  the  right  (3);  to  the  left 
(4);  forward  (5);  and  recover  (6).  Repeat,  beginning  on  the 
right. 

Sixth  Series. 

This  series  is  the  same  as  the  fifth  series  of  the  setting-up  exercises, 
prescribed  for  trained  soldiers. 


CLUB  EXERCISES. 


The  effect  of  these  exercises,  when  performed  with  light  chibs,  is 
chiefly  a  neural  one,  hence  they  are  primary  factors  in  the  develop- 
ment of  grace  and  coordination  and  rhythm.  As  they  tend  to 
supple  the  muscles  and  articulations  of  the  shoulders  and  of  the 
upper  and  fore  arms  and  wrist,  they  are  indicated  in  cases  where 
there  is  a  tendency  toward  what  is  ordinarily  known  as  "muscle 
bound." 

There  is  a  great  A-ariety  of  movements  with  the  clubs,  but  for  the 
purposes  of  this  manual  the  fundamental  principles  will  suffice, 
and  therefore  only  these  are  included. 

The  club  exercises  consist  of  arm  and  urist  circles,  the  former 
being  divided  into  extended  or  full-arm  circles  and  bent  or  half-arm 
circles.  In  the  extended  arm  circle  the  shoulder  is  the  pivot  and  in 
the  bent  arm  circle  the  elbow. 

These  circles  derive  their  designation  from  the  direction  in  which 
the  club  moves  with  reference  to  a  median  vertical  line  running 
through  the  body;  thus  an  outward  circle  is  one  in  which  the  initial 
moAcment  of  the  club  is  away  from  this  line  and  an  inward  circle 
where  that  movement  is  toward  it;  2i  forward  circle  is  one  in  which 
it  moves  to  the  front  and  a  backward  circle  in  which  it  moves  to  the 
rear.  When  both  clubs  move  in  the  same  plane,  the  direction  is 
either  right  or  left,  forward  or  backward,  and  when  they  moA'e  in 
opposite  directions  the  circles  are  either  inward  or  outward. 

The  starting  position  from  which  these  exercises  are  performed  is 
assumed  at  the  command : 

1,  Clubs  to  the  starting  position,  2.  RAISE. 

31853°— 14 8  113 


114 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


At  the  command  raise  the  chibs  are  brought  to  a  vertical  position 
by  flexing  the  forearms  well  up  to  the  upper  arms  without  stiffness; 


Fig.  1. 


the  club  is  in  prolongation  of  the  forearm,  and  the  hands  are  at  the 
height  of  and  opposite  the  shoulders;  the  fingers  grasp  the  neck  of 
the  club  loosely  with  the  thumbs  partially  extended  in  opposition 
to  the  fingers;  the  knob  of  the  club  projects  beyond  the  little  finger; 
the  upper  arms  rest  loosely  against  the  sides  of  the  body,  and  the 
distance  between  the  hands  is  the  same  as  the  width  of  the  chest, 
Fig.  1. 


CLUB  EXERCISES. 


115 


At  the  command:  1.  Clubs,  2.  DOWN,  the  chibs  are  lowered  to 
the  sides,  arms  extended. 


Fig.  2. 
Single-Arm  Exercises. 

Extended  arm  circle  outward.     Fig.  2. 

IJxtended  arm  circle  inward. 

Extended  arm  circle  forward.     Fig.  3. 

Extended  arm  circle  backward. 

Command :    1.    Extended    right   arm    circle   outward,    2.    SWING, 

3.  HALT. 
Continue  at  one,  two. 


116  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

The  right  arm  is  extended  overhead  without  stiffness  and  the 
ckib  is  circled  away  from  the  body;  when  it  swings  across  the  body 
the  arm  is  flexed  slightly  at  the  elbow  in  order  that  the  body  does 
not  become  deranged.     This  rule  is  general. 


Fig. 3. 

The  count  should  Ije  given  just  as  the  club  reaches  the  horizontal 
in  its  descent.     This  rule,  too,  is  general. 

In  all  club  exercises  it  should  be  the  endeavor  of  the  men  to  keep 
the  cltib  in  a  plane  parallel  with  the  body  throughout  its  movement. 

At  halt  the  starting  position  is  resumed. 


CLUB   EXERCISES. 
Single  Bent  Arm  Exercises. 


117 


Repeat  the  extended  arm  circles,  substituting  the  word  hent  for 
the  word  extended  in  the  command  given  above. 


Fig. 4. 
Single-AVrist  Circles. 

1.  Wrist  circle  forward,  inside  or  outside  of  arms.    Fig.  4. 

2.  Wrist  circle  backward,  inside  or  outside  of  arms. 

3.  Wrist  circle  inward,  behind  shoulders.     Fig.  5. 

4.  Wrist  circle  outward,  behind  shoulders. 

5.  Horizontal  wrist  circle,  inward  or  outward,  over  or  under  arms. 

Fig.  6. 
Command:  1.  Wrist  circle  right  forward,  2.  SWING,  3.  HALT. 
Continue  at  one,  two. 


118  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  5. 


CLUB  EXERCISES. 


119 


Fig.  G. 


120 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Double  Extended  Arm  Circles, 


In  these  exercises  both  clubs  move  simultaneously, 

1.  Double  extended  arm  circle  to  the  right.     Fig.  7. 

2.  Same,  left. 


^ 


Fig. 7. 

3.  Double  extended  arm  circle  forward. 

4.  Same,  backward. 

5.  Double  extended  arm  circle  inward.     Fig. 

6.  Same,  outward. 


CLTTB  EXERCISES. 


121 


Command:  Double  extended  arm  circle  right,  2.  SWING,  3.  HALT. 

Continue  at  one,  two. 

In  the  double  circles,  to  the  right  and  left,  the  distance  be- 
tween the  hands  remains  the  same  and  the  clubs  should  always 
be  in  prolongation  of  the  arms.  Execute  above  with  double 
bent  arm  circles. 


Fig.  8. 

1.  Double  wrist  circles  forward,  inside  or  outside  of  arms, 

2.  Same,  backward. 

3.  Double  WTist  circles  inward,  behind  shoulders.     Fig.  9. 

4.  Same,  outward. 


122  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

5.  Double  wrist  circles  forward,  inside  or  outside  of  arms. 

6.  Same,  backward. 

7.  Double  horizontal  wrist    circles,  right    or  left,     over  or    under 

arms.     Fig.  10. 
Command:  1.  Double  wi-ist  circles  forward,  2.  SWING,  3.  HALT. 


Fig.  9. 

Continue  at  one,  two. 

In  the  wrist  circles  the  fingers  should  be  brought  into  play 
as  much  as  possible  and  the  elbow  and  shoulder  joints  should 
be  relaxed. 


CLUB  EXERCISES. 


Fig.  10. 


124  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

Single  Arm  and  Wrist  Circle  Combination. 

1.  Single  extended,  or  bent,  arm  circles  outward  with  wrist  circles 
behind  shoulder  in  the  same  direction.     Fi^.  11. 


. 

mk 

[T^ 

1 



Fig.  11. 

2.  Same,  inward. 

3.  Single  extended,  or  bent,  arm  circles  forward  with  wrist  circle 

in  the  same  direction. 

4.  Same,  backward. 


CLUB   EXERCISES.  125 

Single  half  bent  arm  circle  inward  and  horizontal  wrist  circle 
inward  over  arm,  the  club  moving  across  body.     Fig.  12. 

Single  bent  arm  circle  outward  and  horizontal  wrist  circle  out- 
ward over  arm,  the  club  moving  across  the  body. 


Fig. 12. 


In  the  above  exercises  and  in  all  that  follow  the  description  of 
the  combination  always  constitutes  the  preparatory  command;  when 
this  is  too  lengthy,  however,  the  caution  ready  should  precede  the 
command  swins:. 


126  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Double  Arm  and  Wrist  Combination. 

1.  Double  extended,  or  bent  arm,  circles  to  the  right  and  wrist  cir- 

cles behind  shoulders  in  the  same  direction.     Fig.  13. 

2.  Same  to  the  left. 


Fig. 13. 

3.  Double  extended,  or  bent  arm,  circles  inward  and  WTist  circles  in 

the  same  direction  behind  shoulders.     Fig.  14. 

4.  Same,  outward. 

5.  Double  extended,  or  bent  arm,  circles  forward  with  wrist  circles 

in  the  same  direction. 

6.  Same,  backward. 


CLUB  EXERCISES. 


127 


Fig. 14. 


128  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

7.  Double  bent  arm  half  circles  inward,  to  side  horizontal  and  hori- 

zontal ^vrist  circles  over  arms  inward. 

8.  Same  arm  and  wrist  circles  mo  vim?  outward. 


Fig. 15. 

9.  Double  bent  arm  half  circle  to  the  right  with  wrist  circles  over 

arms  to  the  right. 

10.  Same,  left. 

11.  Double  arm  circles  to  the  right  with  wrist  circles  behind  shoul- 

ders in  the  same  direction,  the  right  club  leading  by  half  a 
swing.     ''The  Mill." 

12.  Same  to  the  left. 


CLUB   EXERCISES.  129 

13.  Double  arm  circles  inward  with  wrist  circles  behind  shoulders 

in  same  direction;  the  right  arm  begins  with  the  arm  circle 
and  the  left  with  the  wrist  circle.     Fig.  15. 

14.  Same,  swinging  clubs  outward. 

Club  Combixatiox. 

The  best  results  are  obtained  by  combining  these  simple  move- 
ments into  one  combination,  the  swinging  of  which  should  be  made 
the  objective. 

Each  exercise  is  repeated  four  times. 

1.  Right  extended  arm  circle  outward. 

2.  Right  bent  arm  circle  outward. 

3.  Right  bent  arm  circle  outward  with  wrist  circle  behind  shoul- 

ders in  same  direction. 


tls, 


5.  kSame  ^vith  the  left  arm.   , 

6.J 

7.  Right  extended  arm  circle  inward. 

8.  Right  bent  arm  circle  inward. 

9.  Right  bent  arm  circle  inward  with  wrist  circle  behind  shoulders 

in  same  direction. 
10.1 

11.  [Same  with  the  left  arm. 
12.J 

13.  Double  extended  arm  circles  right. 

14.  Double  bent  arm  circles  right. 

15.  Double  extended  arm  circles  left. 

16.  Double  bent  arm  circles  left. 

17.  Double  extended  arm  circle  inward  (cross  arms  above). 

18.  Reverse  at  the  horizontal  and  double  extended  arm  circles  out- 

ward (cross  arms  below). 

19.  Change  to  double  bent  arm  circle  outward  with  wrist  circles 

behind  shoulders  in  the  same  direction. 

31853°— 14 9 


130  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

20.  After  the  fourth  wrist  circle  the  clubs  are  brought  forward  over- 

head and  the  bent  arm  and  A^Tist  circles  are  reversed,  now 
being  inward. 

21.  After  the  fourth  swing  the  left  arm  continues  to  circle  inward  as 

in  20;  while  the  right  club  executes  an  additional  \\Tist  cir- 
cle and  then  resumes  the  inward  arm  and  ^Tist  circles  de- 
scribed under  20.  This  is  the  inward  ''right  and  left"  move- 
ment, the  right  club  being  swung  in  a  wrist  circle  behind  the 
shoulder,  while  the  left  arm  performs  the  arm  circle  in  front 
of  the  body;  the  clubs  alternating  in  the  wrist  and  arm  circles. 

22.  After  the  left  wrist  has  performed  the  fourth  circle  inward  be- 

hind the  shoulder  and  the  right  arm  is  about  to  reach  the 
horizontal  on  the  right,  the  course  of  the  clubs  is  reversed; 
the  left  wrist  beginning  the  new  movement  with  the  outward 
wrist  circle  and  the  right  club  with  the  outward  arm  circle; 
the  outward  "right  and  left"  movement,  clubs  alternating  as 
in  21. 

23.  At  the  completion  of  the  last  outward  wrist  circle  with  the  right 

club  and  the  arm  circle  with  the  left,  both  clubs  are  joined 
at  the  right  shoulder  and  swung  in  a  double  bent  arm  circle 
to  the  right,  with  wrist  circles  behind  shoulders  in  the  same 
direction. 

24.  After  completing  the  last  wrist  circle  to  the  right,  the  movement 

is  reversed  by  swinging  the  right  club  over  the  head  and  the 
left  over  the  shoulder,  and  both  clubs  are  swung  as  in  23, 
to  the  left. 

25.  After  the  fom'th  wrist  circle  behind  the  shoulders  to  the  left 

both  clubs  are  swung  in  a  half  bent-arm  circle  from  the  left 
to  the  horizontal  on  the  right,  from  where  they  are  brought 
back  to  the  left  horizontal  by  circling  the  clubs  to  the  left 
in  wrist  circles  over  the  arms. 


CLUB   EXERCISES.  131 

26.  Upon  completing  the  last  wrist  circle  to  the  left,  the  movement 

is  reversed  by  reversing  the  wrist  circles  from  left  to  right 
and  continuing  as  in  25  in  the  opposite  direction. 

27.  After  the  fourth  wrist  circle  from  left  to  right,  both  clubs  are 

swung  in  the  double  bent-arm  circles  to  the  right  %vith  the 
wrist  circles  in  the  same  direction  behind  the  shoulder; 
they  are  then  swung  downward  \\dth  a  double  half-arm  circle 
to  the  left  horizontal  and  brought  from  there  to  the  right 
horizontal  by  a  horizontal  ^vrist  circle  over  the  arms  from  left 
to  right  (26). 

28.  After  the  fourth  wrist  circle  from  the  left  to  the  right,  the  clubs 

are  brought  from  the  right  horizontal  to  the  left  horizontal 
by  means  of  a  horizontal  wrist  circle  and  the  entire  combina- 
tion (27)  is  swung  from  left  to  right. 

29.  ^^^len  the  clubs  reach  the  left  horizontal  after  the  foiu-th  hori- 

zontal circle  from  the  right  horizontal,  they  are  swung  in  a 
bent-arm  circle  from  left  to  right  until  they  reach  a  point  at 
the  height  of  the  shoulders;  from  here  the  left  club  is  swung 
in  a  bent-arm  circle  forward  and  the  right  club  describes  an 
inner  wrist  circle  behind  the  shoulders;  after  the  completion 
of  these  circles  the  left  club  circles  behind  the  shoulder  and 
the  right  club  circles  forward  in  a  bent-arm  swing;  this  is  the 
"forward  right-and-left"  movement,  one  club  circhng  in  a 
wrist  circle  while  the  other  is  describing  the  arm  circle  (21) 
only  parallel  ^\-ith  the  sides  of  the  body. 

30.  After  SA\-inging  the  combination  four  times  on  the  right  and  the 

same  number  of  times  on  the  left,  the  clubs  are  joined  on  the 
right  and  swung  in  a  double  bent-arm  circle  forward  with 
wrist  circles  to  the  right.  As  the  clubs  are  extended  forward, 
they  are  changed  to  the  left  side  of  the  body  and  the  same 
movement  is  taken  on  that  side;  alternate  from  right  to  left, 
swinging  the  combination  four  times  on  each  side. 


132  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

31.  After  the  last  circle  on  the  left  the  clubs  are  brought  to  the 
starting  position  and  the  following  movements  are  performed 
once: 

1.  Wrist  circles  forward  on  outside  of  arms. 

2.  Half-arm  circles  forward  and  backward. 

3.  Heturn  to  starting  position. 

4.  Wrist  circles  forward  outside  of  arms. 

5.  Wrist  circles  inside  of  arms,  clubs  coming  in  contact  with  arm 

pits.     Return  to  starting  position. 

6.  Wrist  circles  outside  of  arms. 

7.  Swing  clubs  downward  as  in  2. 

8.  Return  to  starting  position  as  in  3. 

Numbers  indicate  the  counts  in  the  last  combination. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


The  object  of  these  exercises,  wliich  may  also  be  performed  with 
wands  or  bar  bells,  is  to  develop  the  muscles  of  the  arms,  shoulders, 
and  back  so  that  the  men  will  become  accustomed  to  the  weight 
of  the  piece  and  learn  to  wield  it  with  that  "handiness"  so  essential 
to  its  successful  use.  "When  these  exercises  are  combined  with 
movements  of  the  various  other  parts  of  the  body,  they  serve  as  a 
splendid,  though  rather  strenuous,  method  for  the  all-round  devel- 
opment of  the  men.  As  the  weight  of  the  piece  is  considerable 
instructors  are  cautioned  to  be  reasonable  in  their  demands.  Far 
better  results  are  obtained  if  these  exerci.ses  are  performed  at  com- 
mands than  when  they  are  grouped  and  performed  for  spectacular 
purpose-. 

All  the  exercises  start  from  the  starting  position,  which  is  the 
low  extended  arm  horizontal  position  in  front  of  the  body,  arms 
straight;  the  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  and  the 
left  hand  the  barrel;  the  knuckles  turned  to  the  front  and  the  dis- 
tance between  the  hands  slightly  greater  than  the  ^vidth  of  the 
shoulders.     Fig.  1. 

This  position  is  assumed  at  the  command:  1.  Starting,  2.  POSI- 
TION ;  at  the  command  position  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  port  and 
lowered  to  the  front  horizontal  snappily. 

To  recover  the  po.sition  of  order,  command:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS; 
the  piece  is  first  brought  to  the  port  and  then  ordered. 

133 


134  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Arm  Exercises. 
From  the  starting  position  (Fig.  1);  all  exercises  are  in  two  counts. 

1.  Raise  piece  to  front  extended  arm  horizontal.. 

2.  Raise  piece  to  high  overhead,  extended  arm  horizontal. 

3.  Raise  piece  to  side  horizontal,  right  or  left.     Fig.  2. 

4.  Raise  piece  to  front  perpendicular,  right  or  left  hand  up.     Fig.  3. 

5.  Raise  piece  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  waist  high. 

6.  Raise  piece  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  shoulder  high.     Fig.  4. 

7.  Raise  piece  to  rear  bent  arm  horizontal,  on  shoulders.     Fig.  5. 

8.  Raise  piece  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  shoulder  high,  arms 

crossed,  left  over  right  or  vice  versa. 

9.  Raise  piece  to  low  side  perpendicular,  right  or  left,  right  or  left 

hand  up.     Fig.  6. 

10.  Raise  piece  to  high  side  perpendicular,  right  or  left.     Fig.  7. 

In  the  above  exercises  the  movement  begins  at  the  com- 
mand ''EXERCISE"  and  is  discontinued  at  ''HALT." 

From  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  shoulder  high: 

11.  Thrust  piece  forward,  upward,  downward  or  sideward,  right  or 

left. 

12.  Thrust  piece  upward  from  rear,  bent  arm  horizontal. 

From  high  extended  arm  horizontal: 

13.  Circle  piece  from  right  to  left,  or  from  left  to  right.     Describe 

complete  circle  parallel  with  the  front  of  the  body. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


135 


Fig.  1. 


136  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


■"*~. 

■?:-'*     .■•4' 

Fig.  2. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES. 


137 


Fig.  3. 


138 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 4. 


PvirLE   EXERCISES. 


139 


Fig.  5. 


140 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. g. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


141 


Fig.  7. 


142  MANUAL   OF   PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

Arm  Combixatioxs. 

All  of  the  following  exercises  consist  of  four  movements,  the  third 
earning  the  piece  back  to  the  first  position,  and  the  fourth  to  the 
starting  position;  in  other  words,  the  piece  is  carried  back  in  reverse 
order  at  three  and /our. 

1.  Raise  piece  to  high  extended  arm  horizontal;  flex  to  the  bent 

arm  horizontal  in  front  of  shoulders  and  return  in  reverse 
order. 

2.  Same  as  above,  except  that  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  shoulders 

in  rear  of  head. 

3.  Raise  piece  as  in  1,  lower  to   right  horizontal,  and   return  in 

reverse  order. 

4.  Same,  left. 

5.  Raise  piece  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  shoulder  high:  thrust 

piece  upward,  and  return  in  reverse  order. 

6.  Same,  thrusting  piece  forward  or  sideward  right  or  left. 

7.  Raise  piece  to  front  extended  arm  perpendicular,  right  hand 

up:  reverse  bringing  left  hand  up;  reverse  again  and  lower. 
S.  Raise  piece  to  low  side  perpendicular,  left  hand  up;  change  to 

high  side  perpendicular,  right  hand  up ;  and  return  in  reverse 

order. 
9.  Same  on  the  left. 

10.  Raise  piece  to  front  extended  arm  horizontal;  cross  and  bend 

arms  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal  right  over  left;  and  return 
in  reverse  order. 

11.  Raise  piece  to  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  arms  crossed,  right  over 

left;  change  by  crossing  left  over  right;  reverse  and  down. 

Arm.  Leg,  axd  Truxk  Combixatioxs. 

From  the  starting  posirion:  All  exercises  in  two  coimts. 

1.  Raise  piece  to  front  extended  arm  horizontal  and  bend  knees 
quarter,  half,  or  full. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES.  Ua 

2.  Raise  piece  to  high  extended  arm  horizontal  and  raise  on  toes. 

3.  Raise  piece  as  in  2  and  bend  trunk  forward. 

4.  Raise  piece  to  rear  bent  arm  horizontal  on  shoulders  and  bend 

trunk  forward. 

5.  Raise  piece  to  front  perpendicular,  left  hand  up,  and  bend  trunk 

sideward  right.     Fig.  8. 

6.  Same  to  the  left,  right  hand  up. 

7.  Raise  piece  to  high  right  side  perpendicular  and  bend  trunk 

sideward  left. 

8.  Same,  piece  on  the  left,  bending  trunk  to  the  right. 

From  front  bent  arm  horizontal,  shoulder  high. 

9.  Thrust  piece  forward  or  upward  and  bend  knees,  quarter,  half, 

or  full. 

10.  Raise  piece  forward  and  upward  and  bend  trunk  forward, 

11.  Thrust  piece  sideward  right  and  bend  trunk  sideward  left. 

12.  Same  reversed. 

13.  Thrust  piece  forward  and  twist  body  to  the  left  or  right. 

14.  Thrust  piece  upward  and  bend  trunk  backward. 

15.  Thrust  piece  upward  and  hop  to  side  straddle. 

16.  Thrust  piece  forward  or  upward  and  lunge  forward  right  or  left. 

17.  Thrust  piece  upward  or  forward  and  lunge  obliquely  forward 

right  or  left. 

18.  Thrust  piece  sideward  left  and  lunge  sideward  right  or  left. 

19.  Thrust  piece  upward  and  lunge  backward. 

20.  Thrust  piece  downward    lunge  forward  and  bend  body  forward. 

Fig.  9. 

21.  Thrust  piece  upward;  lunge  backward  and  bend  trunk  back- 

ward.    Fig.  10 

22.  Thrust  piece  side  right  and  lunge  and  b^nd  trunk  sideward  left. 

Fig.  11. 


144 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


^^^^^^F"| 


Fig.  S. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES. 


145 


mmm 


Fig.  9. 


318.'>3''— 14 10 


146  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Fig. 10. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


147 


Fig.  11. 


148  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Rifle  Drill  Combixatiox. 

The   following  exercises  consist   of  four   movements,    the   third 
position  always  corresponding  to  the  first  position  and  the  fourth 


to  the  starting  position.  They  have  been  grouped  and  arranged 
precisely  like  the  setting-up  combination,  Fifth  Lesson,  prescribed 
for  trained  soldiers.  Wlien  performed  as  a  musical  drill,  the  instruc- 
tions laid  down  in  that  lesson  are  applicable  here. 

All  exercises  begin  and  end  with  the  first  or  starting  position; 
rig.  1. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 

First  Gkoup. 

First  Exercise. 


149 


Fig. 13. 
Counts. 
1—2.  Raise  piece  to  bent  arm  front  horizontal,  shoulder  high,  and 

stride  forward  right,  Fig.  12; 
3 — 4.  Face  to  the  left  on  both  heels  and  extend  piece  upward,  Fig.. 

13; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left,  right. 


150  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Second  Exercise. 


Fig. 14. 
Counts. 
1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  extended  high  horizontal,  and  stride  sideward 

right,  Fig.  14; 
3 — 4.  Bend  right  knee  and  lower  piece  to  left  horizontal,  Fig.  15; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


151 


Fig. 15. 


152 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Third  E/crcise. 


Fig. 16. 
Ooants. 
1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  high  side  perpendicular  on  the  left,  left  hand 

up,  and  stride  backward  right.  Fig.  16; 
S — 4.  Face  about  on  heels  and  swing  piece  down  and  up  to  high  side 

perpendicular  on  the  right.  Fig.  17; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — &.  Resume  starting  position. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES. 


153 


Fig. 17. 


154  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fourth  Exercise. 


Fig. is. 
Counts. 
1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  extended  high  horizontal,  and  stride  obliquely 

forward  right.  Fig.  18; 
3 — 4.  Face  about  on  heels  and  lower  piece  to  horizontal  on  shoulders, 

Fig.  19; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


155 


Fig. 19. 


156 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Second  Group. 
First  Exercise. 


Fig.  20. 

Counts. 

1 — 2.  Lower  piece  to  front  extended  horizontal  and  bend  trunk  for- 
ward, Fig.  20; 

3 — 4.  Lunge  obliquely  forward  right  and  raise  piece  to  right  oblique, 
left  hand  at  shoulder,  Fig.  21; 

5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 

7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


157 


Fig.  21. 


158 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Second  Exercise. 


Fig.  22. 
Counts. 
1—2.  Raise  piece  to  high  perpendicular  on  the  left,  left  hand  up, 

and  bend  trunk  sideward  right,  Fig.  22; 
3 — 4.  Lunge  sideward  right  and  swing  piece  down  and  up  to  right 

high  perpendicular,  right  hand  up.  Fig.  23; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


159 


Fig.  23. 


160  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Exercise. 


Fig.  24. 
Counts. 
1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  high  extended  arm  horizontal  and  bend  trunk 

backward,  Fig.  24: 
3 — 4.  Lunge  forward  right,  and  swing  piece  to  side  horizontal,  left 

hand  to  the  rear,  Fig.  25; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position ; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


161 


Fig.  25. 


31853°— U U 


162 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

Four'fi  Ezerci-se. 


Fig.  26. 

Counts. 

1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  right  high  perpendicular  and  sidestep  position 
left,  Fig.  26; 

-3 — 4.  Lunge  sideward  leit  and  sAving  piece  to  left  high  perpendicu- 
lar, Fig.  27; 

6 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 

7 — S .  Resume  starting  position . 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES. 


168 


Fig.  27. 


16i 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Third  Group. 
First  Exercise. 


C!ounts. 
1—2. 


3—4. 

5—6. 

7—8. 


Fig. 28. 

Raise  piece  to  front  bent  horizontal,  arms  crossed,  left  over 

right;  lunge  sideward  right  and  bend  trunk  sideward  right, 

Fig.  28; 
Extend  right  knee  and  bend  trunk  to  the  left,  bending  left  knee 

and  recrossing  arms,  left  over  right,  Fig.  29; 
Resume  first  position ; 
Resume  starting  position . 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


'*  "^  KIFLE   EXERCISES. 


165 


Fig.  29. 


166 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TEAINING. 


Second  Exercise. 


Fig. 30. 

Counts. 

1 — 2.  Raise  piece  to  bent  arm  horizontal;  face  right  and.  lunge  for- 
ward right  and  bend  trunk  forward,  Fig.  30; 

3 — 4.  Raise  trunk  and  turn  to  the  left  on  both  heels  and  extend 
piece  overhead,  Fig.  31; 

5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 

7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 
Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


EIFLE  EXERCISES. 


let 


Fig.  31. 


168 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Exercise. 


Fig.  32. 
Counts. 

1 — 2 .  Raise  piece  to  left  high  horizontal ;  lunge  forward  right,  Fig.  32 ; 
3 — 4.  Bend  trunk  forward  and  lower  piece  to  low  front  horizontal, 

Fig.  33; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE   EXERCISES. 


16^ 


Fig.  33. 


IZO  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fourth  Exercise. 


Fig. 34. 
Counts. 
1 — 2 .  Raise  piece  to  high  extended  horizontal  and  hop  to  side  straddle 

position,  Fig.  34; 
3 — 4 .  Bend  trunk  forward  and  swing  piece  to  extended  low  horizontal, 

left  hand  between  legs,  right  hand  forward,  Fig.  35; 
5 — 6.  Resume  first  position; 
7 — 8.  Resume  starting  position. 

Repeat  left,  right,  left. 


RIFLE  EXERCISES. 


171 


Fig.  35. 


CLIMBIXG. 


Exercises  on  Single  Vertical  Pole. 

Unless  otherwise  directed,  all  exercises  begin  from  and  end  in  the 
position  of  attention. 

Fi^st  Series. 

1.  To  the  extended-arm-hang,  LEAP,  DROP.     Fig.  1. 

At  leap  the  soldier  springs  upward,  grasps  the  pole  with 
his  hands  high  enough  to  clear  the  floor  with*his  toes.  WTiile 
hanging,  his  arms  are  extended,  head  erect,  back  arched 
slightly,  legs  closed  tightly,  knees  straight,  feet  together,  and 
toes  depressed. 

At  drop  he  lights  on  his  toes,  bends  his  knees  to  half -bend 
position;  body  erect,  and  allows  his  hands  to  slip  down  the 
pole  until  his  arms  are  horizontal;  then,  as  he  extends  his 
knees,  he  drops  his  arms  smartly  to  his  sides,  and  resumes  the 
position  of  attention.  Repeat  this  exercise  until  all  can  exe- 
cute it  faultlessly. 

The  following  exercises  are  executed  from  the  extended- 
arm -hang  described  above: 

2.  Repeat    extended-arm-hang    and    drop    several    times    without 

pausing. 

3.  Straddle  and  close  legs. 

4.  Cross  left  leg  over  right  and  reverse. 

5.  Raise  and  lower  heel  or  heels. 

6.  Raise  and  lower  knee  or  knees. 

173 


174  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 1. 


CLIMBING. 


175 


Second  Serks. 


Fig.  2. 


1.  Grasp  pole  between  knees  and  feet,  legs  straight. 

2.  Grasp  pole  between  knees  and  raise  heels. 

3.  Raise  knees  and  grasp  pole  between  them. 

4.  Raise  knee  and  then  extend  leg  forward. 

5.  Raise  knees  and  then  extend  legs  forward,  pole  between 

Fig.  2. 


116 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Climbing-clinch,  right  (left)  leg  in  front.     Fig.  3. 

In  this  position  the  legs  are  crossed  about  the  pole;  right 
he.el  is  pressed  against  the  front,  and  left  instep  against  the 
rear  of  pole;  legs  are  extended. 


CLIMBING. 

Third  Series. 


177 


Fig.  4. 

Assume  above  position  and  change  left  leg  in  front. 

Assume  various  leg  positions  and  change  to  climbing-clinch. 

Assume  climbing-clinch  and  change  to  various  leg  positions,  and 
return  to  climbing  clinch. 

Leap  to  extended-arm-hang  and  draw  body  to  bent-arm-hang. 
Fig.  4. 

Assume  various  leg  positions,  and  change  from  extended  to  bent- 
arm -hang. 

318.53°— 14 12 


178 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fourth  Series. 


Fig. 


1.  Climbing-cliiich  and  remove  and  replace  right  (left)  hand. 

2.  Climbing-clinch  and  raise  knees.     Fig.  5. 

3.  Climbing-clinch,  raise  knees  and  release  hand. 

4.  Leap  to  the  bent-arm-hang. 

5.  Repeat  several  times  without  pausing. 

6.  Execute  the  exercises  described  under  previous  lessons. 


CLIMBING. 

Fifth  Series. 


179 


1.  Climb,  hand  over  hand.     Fig.  6. 

In  the  ordinary  climb  the  legs  should  be  depended  upon 
to  do  most  of  the  work,  the  arms  being  used  chiefly  to  hold 
the  weight  of  the  body  while  the  legs  are  being  raised.  It  is 
essential,  therefore,  that  the  men  learn  to  use  the  legs  properly. 
In  climbing  the  knees  are  raised  as  high  as  possible,  the  pole 


180  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

being  firmly  clinched  by  the  knees,  the  ankles  and  the  feet; 
the  body  is  then  extended  upward  from  the  knees  and  the 
hands  advanced. 
Variety  may  be  given  these  exercises  by  climbing: 

2.  Hand  after  hand,  one  hand  leading. 

3.  Both  hands  simultaneously. 

4.  Alternating  the  climbing-clinch,  from  right  forward  to  left  for- 

ward. 

Si.vth  Series. 

Leap  to  bent-arm-hang  and  climb: 

1.  Hand  over  hand,  without  use  of  legs. 

2.  Hand  after  hand,  without  use  of  legs. 

3.  Climbing  with  use  of  legs  for  speed. 

4.  Climbing  without  use  of  legs  for  speed. 

Exercises  ox  Swinging  Pole. 
Seventh  Series. 
At  Ready  the  soldier  will  grasp  the  pole  in  the  right  hand 
and  move  backward  until  the  pole  is  held  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder.  At  Go  he  will  run  forward,  mo\T.ng  hands 
upward  on  the  pole  as  he  runs,  and  jump  into  the  different 
positions  enumerated  below  just  as  the  pole  begins  to  swing 
upward  on  the  opposite  side.     Fig.  7. 

1.  Leap  to  extended-arm-hang  and  drop  at  end  of  first  rear  swing. 

2.  Same,  dropping  at  end  of  second,  third,  or  fourth  s\ving. 

3.  Same,  assuming  any  of  the  leg  positions. 

4.  Same,   dropping  at  end  of  second  or  third    downward    swing, 

facing  starting  point. 

5.  Leap  to  beut-arm-hang,    dropping    at    end    of    first,  second,  or 

third  swing. 

6.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang  with  legs  in  climbing-clinch. 

7.  Leap  to  climbing-clinch  and  climb  hand  over  hand,  hand  after 

hand,  or  with  both  hands  simultaneously. 


CLIMBING. 


181 


182 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Exercises  on  Two  Poles. 

Eighth  Series. 


Fig.  8. 

1.  Leap  to  extended-arm-hang.     Fig.  8. 

2.  Same,  raising  heels  or  knees,  straddling,  crossing  or  raising  l^s. 

3.  Leap  to  extended-arm-hang,  change  to  climbing-clinch  on  one 

pole,  hands  on  both. 

4.  Same,  changing  both  hands  to  same  pole,  legs  to  the  other. 

5.  Leap  to  extended-arm-hang  and  change  to  inner-climbing-clinch 

on  both  poles.     Knees  in  front  of  the  poles;  feet  twisted 
about  the  poles  from  the  outisde.     Fig.  9. 


CLIMBING. 


188 


o.t  f|:/; 


184 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Ninth  Series. 


11 

■■■mu^HLm^WH 

ii, . 

Fig. 10. 

1.  Leap  to  beiit-arra-hang.     Fig.  10. 

2.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang.  Avith  various  leg  positions. 
'6.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang,  with  inner-climbing-clinch. 

4.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang,  swinging  legs  backward  and  forward. 

5.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang,  swinging  legs  and  turning  over  to  the 

stand. 


CLIMBING. 

Tenth  Series. 


165 


Fig.  U. 

From  the  stand: 

1.  Leap  to  inverted-hanp;.     Fig.  11. 

2.  Leap  and  turn-over  to  the  stand. 

3.  Leap  to  inverted-hang,  straddle  legs  and  press  them  against  pole. 

4.  Leap  to  inverted-inner  climbing-clinch  on  both  poles. 

5.  Climb  inner-climbing-clinch,  hand  and  leg  on  same  side  moving 

together.     Fig.  12. 

6.  Same  as  5,  but  hand  and  leg  on  opposite  side  moving  together. 


186 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Eleventh  Series. 


1 

Fig.  li 


1.  Climb  hand  after  hand  without  the  use  of  the  legs. 

2.  Climb,  moving  both  hands  simultaneously. 

3.  Swing  legs  backward  and  forward  and  climb  hand  after  hand  at 

end  of  forward  swing. 

4.  Execute  the  various  exercises  described  in  two  poles  while  the 

poles  are  swinging. 


CLIMBING.  18T 

Single  and  Double  Ropes. 

With  few  exceptions  the  various  exercises  described  above  may- 
be performed  on  the  ropes.  Considerable  difficulty  is  added  to  the 
rope  climbing  on  account  of  its  flexibility. 

Single  Inclined  Pole  or  Rope. 

Twelfth  Series. 

1.  Stand  under  and  facing  low  end  of  the  rope  and  leap  to  extended- 

arm-hang.     Fig.  13. 

2.  Same,  leaping  to  bent-arm-hang. 

3.  Stand  under  and  facing  high  end  of  rope  and  leap  to  extended- 

arm-hang.     Fig.  14. 

4 .  Same  to  bent-arm-hang. 

5.  Stand  sidewise,  facing  rope,  the  rope  parallel  with  front  of  body^ 

and  leap  to  extended  or  bent-arm-hang. 

6.  Stand  under  facing  low  end  of  rope  and  leap  to  extended  or  bent 

arm-hang,   right  leg   (or  left)   thrown  over  rope,    other  leg: 
extended.     Fig.  15. 

7.  Same  as  above,  both  legs  crossed  over  rope.     Fig.  16. 

Thirteenth  Series. 

1.  Same  as  above,  leap  to  arm-hang,  legs  crossed  over  rope,  andl 

climb  upward. 

2.  Assume  position  as  above  and  climb  upward,  legs  being  thrown. 

over  rope  alternately. 

3.  Stand  as  above  and  leap  to  either  arm-hang  and  climb  upward. 

hand  over  hand  without  use  of  legs. 

4.  Stand  facing  high  end  of  rope  and  climb  upward  hand  over  hand. 

Ropes  or  poles  should   be  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about 
45  degrees. 


188  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 13. 


CLIMBING. 


189 


Fig. 14. 


190 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 15. 


CLIMBING. 


191 


Fig.  16. 


JUMPING  EXERCISES. 


Broad. 
First  Series. 


The  preliminary  exercises  in  jumping  may  l)e  practiced  by  large 
squads  and  at  command.  These  exercises  are  valuable  because  the 
men  will  learn  to  jump  in  proper  form.  The  class  may  be  divided 
into  squads  of  four,  six,  or  eight  men. 

The  first  squad  will  take  its  place  in  front  of  the  class  and  execute 
the  following  exercises  from  one  end  of  the  gymnasium  to  the  other: 
1.  Ordinary  standing  jump,  coming  to  attention  after  every  jump. 

At  Ready  the  squad  will  raise  arms  forward  shoulder  high  and 
raise  body  on  toes,  Fig.  1 ;  at  Leap  the  arms  are  swung  to  the 
rear  without  deranging  the  position  of  the  body,  and  the  knees 
are  slightly  bent,  Fig,  2;  as  the  arms  come  forward  again  the 
knees  are  extended  and  the  body  is  thrust  from  the  floor  and 
advanced  about  a  yard.  During  the  flight  the  feet  are  closed 
and  depressed,  the  legs  are  extended,  the  body  is  well  arched, 
arms  are  forward,  and  the  head  is  erect.  Fig.  3.  In  alighting 
the  toes  strike  the  floor  first,  the  knees  are  well  bent  and  ex- 
tended, the  arms  are  dropped,  and  the  position  of  attention 
is  smartly  resumed. 

Repeat  at  commands  Ready ^  Leap. 

31853°— 14 13  193 


194  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


JUMPING  EXERCISES. 


195 


I'IG.  3. 


196  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

2.  Continuous  broad  jumps. 

Execute  precisely  as  in  1,  except  that  there  is  no  pause 
between  the  jumps,  everj^  jump  after  the  first  being  made 
from  the  bent-knee  position;  the  arms  continue  to  swing  back 
and  forth  with  every  jump. 

Continue  at  command  Leap,  given  just  as  the  toes  strike  the 

floor,  and  discontinue  at  the  command  Halt. 

The  entire  class  may  take  part  in  these  exercises,  1  and  2,  the 

squads  following  each  other  at  intervals  of  two  or  three  jumps,  and 

breaking  away  to  the  right  and  left  when  the  end  of  the  gymnasium 

has  been  reached  and  reassembling  at  the  starting  point. 

In  the  following  exercises  a  take-off  and  mattress  should  be  used. 
As  the  object  is  form  rather  than  distance,  the  jump  should  not  be 
more  than  from  5  to  7  feet.  In  all  exercises  the  preliminary  posi- 
tion is  the  same  as  in  1.  The  commands  are  Ready,  Leap;  the  suc- 
ceeding man  takes  the  place  of  the  jumper  without  command;  the 
jumper  joins  the  rear  of  the  squad. 

3.  Jump  from  both  feet  and  land  on  both  feet. 

4.  Same,  turning  right  or  left,  or  right  or  left  about. 

5.  Same  as  in  3,  raising  knees  during  the  flight. 

6.  Same  as  in  3,  landing  on  one  foot. 

7.  Hop-jump  from  one  foot  and  land  on  lioth. 

8.  Same,  landing  on  opposite  foot. 

9.  Same,  landing  on  same  foot. 

Second  Series. 

1.  Stride-jump,  landing  on  both  feet. 

The  preliminary  position  for  the  stride-jump  is  as  follows: 
One  foot  on  edge  of  take-off;  the  other,  resting  on  toes,  is 
placed  to  the  rear  of  the  jumping  foot;  arms  forward.  In  exe- 
cuting the  jump  the  arms  are  swung  downward  and  then  to 
the  front  and  the  leg  in  the  rear  is  swung  for«'ard. 

2.  Same  as  in  1,  with  turns. 

3.  Standing  broad  jump  for  distance. 


JUMPING  EXERCISES.  197 

4.  Walk,  increasing  the  pace  as  the  take-off  is  neared,  and  execute 

the  various  jumps  described  under  2.     Distance,  6  to  10  feet. 

5.  Run,  increasing  the  pace  as  the  take-off  is  neared,  and  execute 

the  jumps  described  under  above  series  and  the  first  three  of 
this  series.     Distance  8  to  10  feet. 

6.  Run  backward  toward  take-off,  turn  about  without  decreasing 

the  pace,  at  half  the  distance,  and  stride-jump.     This  is  the 
ordinary  broad  jump. 

Third  Series. 

1.  Run  forward  toward  take-off,  turn  all  the  way  around  and  jump, 

2.  Run  backward  toward  take-off  and  turn  once  and  a  half  around 

and  jump. 

3.  Run  forward  and  turn  twice  around  and  jump. 

4.  Run  forward,  turn  once  to  the  left  and  immediately  to  the  right 

and  jump. 

5.  Run  backward,  turn  facing  take-off,  run  several  steps  and  turn 

around  once  and  jump. 

6.  Run  backward  and  continue  to  turn  as  often  as  possible  and  jump. 

Fourth  Series. 

1.  Run  forward  and  pick  up  a  boxing  glove  or  other  article  placed 

half  way  between  starting  point  and  take-off,  without  decreas- 
ing the  pace,  and  jump. 

2.  Turn,  pick  up  the  glove,  and  jump. 

3.  Turn,  pick  up  the  glove,  turn  again,  and  jump. 

4.  Run,  imitate  a  stumble  half  way  to  the  take-off,  and  jump. 

To  imitate  a  stumble,  run  forward  at  a  good  pace,  lean  for- 
ward quickly,  and  endeavor  to  touch  the  floor  with  the  hands; 
gather  as  quickly  as  posvsible  and  jump. 

5.  Combine  the  turns  with  the  stumble. 

6.  Running  broad-jump  for  distance. 


198  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

High  Jumping. 

Fifth  Series. 

In  these  exercises  it  is  best  not  to  use  a  take-off  board.  The  stick 
for  these  exercises  should  be  placed  about  30  inches  from  the  floor. 
Arms  are  swung  overhead. 

1.  Face  the  stick  and  jump  forward  from  both  feet. 

2.  Same,  with  turns  to  the  right  or  left. 

3.  Same,  grasping  toes  with  hands  for  a  moment,  with  one  or  both 

hands. 

4.  Standing  with  right  or  left  side  turned  to  stick,  jump  sideward 

from  both  feet. 

5.  Same  as  in  4,  jumping  as  in  2. 

6.  Same  as  in  4,  jumping  as  in  3. 

Sixth  Series. 

1.  Stand  as  in  4  in  Fifth  Series,  and  stride-jump  over  stick,  without 

turning. 

2.  Same  as  1,  turning  away  from  the  bar  during  the  flight. 

3.  Same  as  2,  turning  about  during  the  flight. 

4.  Face  the  stick  and  hop  over  it  from  one  foot,  landing  on  both. 

5.  Same,  landing  on  the  same  foot. 

6.  Standing  high-jump  for  height. 

Seventh  Series. 

Execute  the  various  high  jumps  described,  first  from  a  walk 
and  then  from  a  run. 

1.  Running  high-jump  for  height. 

The  men  should  be  permitted  to  select  their  own  style  of 
run,  jump,  and  take-off  for  these  exercises. 

2.  Standing  or  running  broad-high  jump. 

In  this  jump  the  take-off  and  the  jumping  standards  are 
used;  the  take-off  being  moved  back  and  the  jumping  stick 
raised  after  every  jump. 


APPARATUS— SIDE    AND    LONG    HORSE 
EXERCISES. 


APPARATUS. 

The  object  of  apparatus  work  is  described  under  paragraph  2,  to 
which  the  attention  of  instructors  is  called. 

The  terms  "cross"  and  ''side,"  as  used  in  the  text  with  reference 
to  the  various  exercises,  denote  the  relation  between  the  longest  line 
of  the  apparatus  and  the  line  running  from  shoulder  to  shoulder  of 
the  soldier.  Thus,  a  "side  rest''  is  one  where  the  line  from  shoul- 
der to  shoulder  of  the  soldier  is  parallel  to  the  longest  line  of  the 
apparatus.  In  the  case  of  the  horse  this  line  is  from  croup  to  neck. 
A  "cross  rest"  is  one  where  the  line  of  the  shoulders  is  perpendicular 
to  the  longest  line  of  the  apparatus. 

In  all  dismounts  from  any  apparatus  the  body  invariably  alights 
on  the  toes,  the  knees  being  well  bent  and  separated  so  the  point  of 
the  knees  is  directly  over  the  toes;  the  body  is  erect  on  the  hips, 
head  up.  From  this  position  the  knees  are  extended  quickly  and 
smartly  to  the  position  of  attention.  The  entire  motion  from  the 
moment  the  toes  strike  the  ground  till  the  position  of  attention  is 
assumed  is  a  continuous  one. 

^^^len  exercising  on  the  parallel  bars,  the  horses,  or  the  vaulting 
bars  the  hand  nearest  the  apparatus  rests  on  it  momentarily  while 
dismounting,  but  it  is  lowered  to  the  side  smartly  when  the  knees 
are  being  extended.  The  hand  farthest  from  the  apparatus  is  low- 
ered to  the  side,  ^\^len  the  front  of  the  body  is  turned  to  the  appa- 
ratus in  dismounting,  both  hands  rest  on  it. 

199 


JiOO  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

The  preparatory  command  for  all  exercises  on  apparatus  is  Ready; 
the  command  of  execution,  depending  upon  the  character  of  the 
movement,  is  Leap,  Mount  or  Vault.  To  alight  from  any  apparatus 
command  Dismount  or  Drop. 

VAULTING  HORSE  EXERCISES. 

SIDE  HORSE  EXERCISES. 

Exercises  when  the  take-off  is  placed  at  the  side  of  the  horse  are 
known  as  side  horse  exercises. 

The  horse  is  placed  in  such  a  position  that  the  neck  is  on  the  left 
of  the  take-off. 

As  a  rule  these  exercises  are  executed  with  the  pommels  fixed; 
the  height  of  these  pommels  being  equal  to  the  height  of  the  breast 
of  the  average  man  of  the  squad. 

The  parts  of  the  horse  to  which  reference  is  made  in  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  exercises  are:  The  neck,  saddle,  croup,  and  the  pommels. 
The  pommel  between  the  neck  and  the  saddle  is  known  as  the  front 
and  that  between  the  saddle  and  the  croup  as  the  rear  pommel. 

The  side  nearest  the  take-off  is  the  near  and  the  opposite  side  the 
off-side. 

Horse  exercises  are  intended  to  specially  develop  acti%dty,  agility, 
and  gracefulness,  which  can,  however,  be  obtained  only  by  con- 
stantly insisting  that  even*^  movement,  no  matter  how  simple,  be 
accurately  and  smartly  executed. 

These  exercises  are  of  special  value  in  the  training  of  mounted 
troops,  as  they  teach  men  the  proper  coordination  of  those  muscles 
that  are  employed  in  riding. 

First  Series. 

All  of  these  exercises  should  first  be  executed  from  a  stand  on  the 
take-off,  and  later  from  a  run.  When  executed  from  a  run,  the 
soldier  leaps  from  one  foot  from  the  floor,  lands  on  the  take-off  on 


APPARATUS.  201 

both  feet,  and  immediately  proceeds  to  jump  upon  or  over  the  horse 
from  both  feet. 

Position  of  attention  on  the  take-off: 

1.  To  extended-side-rest,  Ready,  LEAP,  DISMOUNT.     Fig.  1. 

At  Ready  the  soldier  grasps  the  pommels  firmly  and  raises 
his  body  on  the  toes,  arms  straight,  body  erect;  at  Leajp  he 
bends  his  knees  slightly  and  springs  upward  to  the  rest  on 
the  hands,  thighs  against  the  horse.  In  this  position  his  head 
is  erect,  chest  out,  shoulders  square,  arms  straight,  legs 
extended  and  closed  tightly,  feet  together,  and  toes  depressed. 
At  Dismount  he  allows  his  body  to  drop  backward  without 
bending  his  arms  and  alights  on  his  toes,  bending  his  knees 
slightly  as  he  does  so,  and  dropping  his  arms  smartly  to  his 
sides  as  he  extends  his  knees. 

2.  Leap  to  extended-side-rest  as  before,  dismount,  and,  without 

releasing    hands,    spring    back    to    the    rest    again.     Repeat 
several  times. 
Leap  to  the  extended-side-rest  and  execute  the  following: 

3.  Raise  and  lower  heel  or  heels. 

4.  Raise  and  lower  leg  backward. 

5.  Raise  and  lower  leg  sideward. 

6.  Tumbody  right  (left). 

7.  Turn  body  right  (left)  and  then  about. 

8.  Kneel  on  one  knee,  other  leg  extended  downward. 

9.  Kneel  on  both  knees. 

10.  Squat  on  one  foot,  other  leg  extended  downward. 

11.  Squat  on  both  feet.     Fig.  2. 

12.  Kneel  on  one  knee,  other  leg  extended  backward  horizontally. 

Fig.  3. 


202  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 1. 


APPARATUS. 


Fig.  2. 


204  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 3. 


APPARATUS. 

Second  Series. 


205 


Fig.  4. 

Except  when  otherwise  indicated,  the  dismount  will  be  to  the 
take-off. 

1.  Leap  to  straddle-stand,  feet  outside  of  pommels,  legs  extended, 

hands  retaining  grip  on  pommels.     Fig.  4. 

2.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  oji  croup,  facing  front,  i.e.,  facing  neck" 

Fig.  5. 

3.  Same  on  neck,  facing  croup. 

4.  Same  in  saddle,  swing  leg  over  neck,  facing  croup. 


206 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 


5.  Same  in  saddle,  swinging  leg  over  croup,  facing  neck. 

6.  Same  on  neck,  swing  right  leg  over  neck,  facing  neck. 

7.  Same  in  saddle,  swinging  right  leg  over  front  pommel,  facing  neck. 

8.  Same  in  saddle,  swinging  left  leg  over  rear  pommel,  facing  croup. 

9.  Leap  to  side-mount,  facing  take-off.     Fig.  6. 


APPARATUS. 

Third  Series. 


207 


I 


Fig.  6. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  dismount  will  be  on  the  off-side: 

1.  Execute  the  straddle-mounts  and  dismount,  facing  the  horse. 

2.  Leap  to  squatting-mount  on  both  feet,  and  jump  forward. 

3.  Leap  to  same  position,  feet  outside  of  pommels,  and  jump  forward. 

4.  Leap  to  straddle-stand,  feet  outside  of  pommels,  and  jump  for- 

ward. 

5.  Leap  to  kneeling-mount  on  both  knees  and  jump  forward. 

6.  Mouut  on  croup,  facing  front,  raise  leg  backward  and  mount  in 

saddle,  facing  rear,  and  dismount  on  off-side. 

7.  Same  from  neck  to  saddle. 

8.  Same  from  croup  to  neck. 


208  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Fourth  Series. 

.^..  Execute  the  above  mount,  raising  the  leg  forward  over  the  horse 
and  then  circling  the  other  leg  forward  to  the  mount. 

2.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  front;  place  hands  behind  the  body, 

swing  legs  forward  and  change  to  mount  in  saddle,  then  to 
neck  and  straddle  over  neck  to  position  of  attention. 

3.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  rear;  place  hands  in  front  of  body  and 

swing  legs  backward  and  change  to  saddle,  then  to  neck,  and 
swing  off  backward  to  position  of  attention. 

4.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  rear,  with  left  hand  grasping  rear  pommel; 

twist  trunk  to  mount  on  left  thigh  and  circle  right  leg  to 
mount  in  saddle,  facing  rear;  dismount  on  offside.  Same  to 
neck. 

5.  Mount  on  croup,   facing  rear;   execute  4;  then  grasping  front 

pommel  with  right  hand  twist  trunk  to  mount  on  right  thigh 
and  circle  left  leg  to  mount  on  neck,  facing  rear. 

6.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  neck;  raise  left  leg  forward  to  cross-thigh- 

mount,  then  circle  right  leg  forward  to  right-thigh-mount  in 
saddle,  facing  take-off;  then  circle  left  leg  forward  to  straddle- 
mount  on  neck. 

7.  Same  from  neck  to  saddle  and  from  there  to  croup. 

8.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  neck;  change  left  leg  as  in  6,  and  circle 

right  leg  forward  to  straddle-mount  in  saddle,  facing  croup; 
then  raise  right  leg  forward  to  the  cross-thigh-mount  and 
circle  the  left  leg  to  the  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  neck. 

9.  Same  changes  from  neck  to  saddle  and  back  to  neck. 


APPARATUS.  209 

Fifth  Series. 

1.  Leap  and  pivot  backward  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  rear. 

Fig.  7. 

In  the  pivoting  exercises  one  leg  remains  pressed  against 
the  side  of  the  horse,  acting  as  a  pivot,  while  the  other  leg 
describes  a  circle  backward  or  forward  around  it,  the  body- 
turning  with  the  circling  leg.  Thus,  in  the  above  exercise, 
the  right,  which  is  used  as  a  pivot,  is  pressed  against  th« 
horse  in  line  with  the  rear  pommel,  while  the  left  leg,  raised 
as  nearly  horizontal  as  possible,  describes  a  half  circle  back- 
ward over  the  croup,  the  body  turning  to  the  left. 

2.  Same  exercise  to  the  mount  on  the  neck,  facing  front. 

3.  Leap  to  side-back-rest  and  pivot  forward  to  straddle-mount  on 

croup  or  neck,  facing  saddle.     Fig.  8. 

4.  Leap  and  circle  right  leg  over  rear  pommel  and  mount  in  saddle, 

facing  offside,  and  pivot,  circling  left  leg  to  straddle-mount 
on  croup,  facing  front. 

5.  Same,  circling  right  leg  over  front  pommel  and  pivot,  circling 

left  leg  to  mount  on  neck,  facing  rear. 

6.  Same,  circling  right  leg  over  front  pommel  and  pivot,  circling 

left  leg  to  mount  on  croup,  facing  front. 

7.  Same,  circling  left  leg  over  rear  pommel  and  pivot,  right  leg 

to  mount  on  neck,  facing  rear. 

8.  Place  right  hand  on  front  pommel,  leap  and  circle  right  leg  over 

rear  pommel,  face  left-about  and  pivot,  circling  right  leg  to 
mount  on  croup,  facing  front. 

9.  Place  left  hand  on  rear  pommel,  circle  left  leg  over  front  pommel, 

face  right-about  and  pivot,  circling  right  leg  to  mount   on 
neck. 
31853"— 14 14 


210  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


FiCt.  7. 


APPARATUS. 


211 


Fig.  8. 


212  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Sixth  Series. 

These  exercises  are  executed  while  mounted  on  the  horse,  and 
are  used  to  change  the  direction  of  the  mount,  the  mount  itseh",  or 
as  a  means  to  dismounting.  They  may  be  executed  backward, 
forward  or  sideward,  the  turns  being  to  the  right  or  left  about. 


FiCx.  9. 


Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  front;  grasp  rear  pommel 
with  both  hands,  knuckles  up;  swing  legs  backward  to 
leaning-rest,  arms  extended  and  legs  resting  against  croup  end 
of  horse,  cross  the  legs,  right  under  left,  face  about  and  mount, 
facing  rear;  straddle  off  over  croup.     Fig.  9. 


APPARATUS.  213 

Repeat  above  exercise  gradually,  making  the  pause  in  the  leaning- 
rest  shorter,  until  the  men  can  execute  the  shears  by  touch- 
ing the  horse  with  the  legs  for  a  moment  only. 

Swing  legs  backward  and  back-shears.     Fig.  10. 

In  this  and  in  the  following  exercises  the  men  must  be 
taught  that  the  success  of  this  and  all  of  the  following  exer- 
cises depends  upon  the  position  of  the  legs  and  the  turns  of  the 


Fig. 10. 

body.  The  legs  must  remain  extended  and  be  swung  high 
enough  to  clear  the  horse;  then  as  they  are  being  crossed  the 
body  must  be  turned  quickly. 

4.  Repeat  these  exercises  on  the  neck;  and  then  in  the  saddle. 

5.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  roar;  grasp  the  rear  pommel  with  both 

hands,  knuckles  turned  away  from  the  body,  and  swing  legs 
forward  as  high  as  possible,  lifting  buttocks  from  the  horse. 


214 


MAinJAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


6.  Same  mount;  swing  legs  and  raise  buttocks  as  before,  and  execute 
front  shears.     Fig.  11. 


Fig.  U. 

In  this  exercise  it  is  essential  to  swing  forcibly  enough  to 
raise  the  body  from  the  horse  and  as  the  legs  reach  the  highest 
point  the  body  is  turned  about  quickly,  being  supported  by 
one  arm  only  while  turning.  If  the  turn  is  to  the  left  about, 
the  left  hand  remains  on  the  pommel,  while  the  right  is 
released  the  instant  the  turn  begins.  The  men  must  be  cau- 
tioned that  it  is  in  the  turn  and  not  in  the  crossing  of  the  legs 
that  the  "knack"  of  the  exercise  lies. 


APPARATUS. 


215 


7.  Mount  to  side-straddle  in  saddle,  facing  off-side,  swing  right  leg 
over  front  or  rear  pommel;  swing  legs  sideward  left,  and 
execute  side-shears.    Fig.  12. 


Fig. 12. 


10. 


As  the  legs  are  swung  to  the  left,  the  left  hand  is  raised 
and  the  legs  without  bending  are  changed,  the  right  to  the 
rear  and  the  left  forward  and  the  mount  in  the  saddle  is 
resumed  with  the  left  leg  forward;  the  body  is  not  turned. 

Side-shears  on  the  right,  from  mount  with  left  leg  in  saddle. 

From  the  take-off  swing  right  leg  over  rear  jjommel  and  imme- 
diately execute  8. 

Same,  left  leg  over  front  pommel. 


216  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Seventh  Series. 


These  exercises  may  be  executed  from  the  take-off,  or  from  the 
extended-arm-rest.  With  beginners  the  circles  should  be  first  taken 
from  the  take-off  and  later  from  the  take-off  and  concluding  in  the 
extended-arm-rest;  then  from  the  extended-arm-rest  and  concluding 
in  that  rest. 

Single  circles  are  executed  with  one  and  double  circles  with  both 
legs.  A  single  circle  is  said  to  be  inward  when  it  begins  under  the 
hand  on  the  same  side;  outward,  when  it  begins  under  the  opposite 
hand.     From  the  backward  rest,  this  is  reversed. 

In  the  execution  of  these  exercises  the  men  must  be  cautioned  to 
keep  the  arms  extended  and  the  weight  well  forward  over  the  horse, 
especially  when  the  leg  moves  backward ;  the  leg  is  extended,  and  the 
body  must  not  be  allowed  to  turn.  Proper  cadence  in  order  to  shift 
the  weight  from  hand  to  hand  at  the  proper  moment  will  do  much 
toward  a  successful  execution. 

Single  Circles. 

1.  Half  circle  right  leg  under   left  hand,  and   circle   back  under 

right. 

2.  Same,  with  left  leg. 

3.  Half  circle  right  leg  under  left  hand,  and  circle  back  under  left. 

4.  Same,  with  left  leg. 

5.  Half  circle  right  leg  imder  right  hand,  and  back  under  left. 

6.  Same,  with  left  leg. 

7.  Half  circle  right  leg  under  left  hand,  and  back  under  right. 

8.  Same,  with  left  leg. 


APPARATUS.  217 


Eighth  Series. 


9.  Half  circle  right  leg  under  right  hand,  then  left  under  left  hand, 
to  side-mount,  facing  off-side,  swing  legs  forward  and  dis- 
mount. 

10.  Half  circle  right  leg  under  left  hand,  left  leg  under  left  hand,  to 

mount  and  dismount  as  in  9. 

11.  Circle  right  leg  inward,  complete  circle  without  pausing.    Fig.  13. 

12.  Same,  left. 

13.  Circle  right  leg  outward,  complete  circle  without  pausing.    Fig. 

14. 

14.  Same,  left. 

Ninth  Series. 

Double  Circles  and  Squatting  Exercises. 

1.  Half -double-circle  right,  both  legs  under  right  hand,  to  back- 

rest in  saddle,  swing-off  forward. 

2.  Same,  left. 

3.  Half-double-circle    right    to    back-rest;    and    half-double-circle 

backward  right  to  take-off. 

4.  Same.  left. 

5.  Same,  forward  on  right  and  backward  on  left. 

6.  Same,  forward  on  left  and  backward  on  right. 

Tenth  Series. 

7.  Squat  right  leg  forward  between  arms  to  cross  straddle  and  back- 

ward to  take-off. 

8.  Same,  with  left. 

9.  Squat  forward  with  right,  then  with  left  leg,  and  swing-off. 

10.  Squat  forward  with  right,  then  backward  with  right  and  forward 

with  left,  and  repeat. 

11.  Squat  forward  with  both  feet  to  side-mount,  and  swing-off. 

12.  Same,  to  back-rest,  then  backward  to  take-off. 


218  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 13. 


APPARATUS. 


219 


liL..  i-i. 


220  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Eleventh  Series. 


Fig. 15. 

1.  Squatting- vault.     Fig.  15. 

2.  Squatting- vault  with  horizontal  extension;  legs  are  extended 

horizontally. 

3.  Squatting- vault    with    vertical    extension;    legs    are    extended 

downward. 

4.  Flank-vault,  right  and  left.     Fig.  16. 

5.  Rear-vault,  right  and  left.     Fig.  17. 

6.  Front-vault,  right  and  left.     Fig.  18. 

7.  Straddle-vault.     Fig.  19. 

8.  The  above  vaults  with  turns. 


APPARATUS. 


221 


Fig.  16. 


222 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Fig. 17. 


APPARATUS. 


Fig. is. 


224 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 19. 


APPARATUS.  225 

I.ONG  HORSE  EXERCISES. 

First  Series. 

The  horse  is  placed  lengthwise,  the  pommels  being  removed  and 
the  height  of  the  horse  being  the  same  as  in  the  side  horse  exercises. 

"All  exercises  are  similar  to  the  side  horse  exercises;  when  detailed 
explanations  are  ornitted,  instructors  will  find  them  under  same 
headings  in  the  side  horse  exercises. 

1.  Leap  to  momentary  cross-rest,  hands  on  croup  of  horse,   and 

dismount ;  thighs  do  not  touch  horse. 

2.  Leap  to  side  rest  on  croup,  facing  right  or  left;  fingers  forward 

well  over  opposite  side  of  horse.     Dismount  facing  horse. 
Fig.  20. 

3.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  front;  dismount  facing 

horse  by  swinging  leg  backward. 

4.  Same  mount;  dismount  facing  horse,  by  swinging  leg  forward. 

5.  Same  mount;  dismount  facing  front,  by  swinging  both  legs  for- 

ward. 

6.  Same  mount;  dismount  facing  front,  by  swinging  both  legs  back- 

ward. 

7.  Same  mount;  dismount  facing  rear,  by  pivoting  leg  forward. 

8.  Same  mount;  change  by  raising  leg  forward  to  oblique  mount 

and  pivoting  other  leg  forward  to  mount,  facing  rear. 

9.  Execute  above  mounts  and  changes  by  leaping  to  straddle- 

mount  in  saddle. 

10.  Mount  on  croup,  facing  rear,  leg  is  swung  forward  over  the  croup. 

11.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  neck;  straddle  over  neck  and  dis- 

mount. 

31853°— 14 15 


226  MA!JUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


1 . 

J 

'J 

.''  ♦                 ■■■"'■ 

Fig.  20. 


APPARATUS. 

Second  Series. 
Kneelina -mounts. 


227 


Fig,  21. 

1.  Leap  to  side-kneeling-mount  on  croup,  on  one  or  both  knees, 

facing  left  or  right,  and  dismount  backward.     Fig.  21. 

2.  Leap  as  in  1,  on  both  knees,  and  jump  forward  with  assistance 

from  hands. 

3.  Same  as  in  2,  but  jumping  off  without  using  hands. 

4.  Same  as  3,  jumping  off  with  quarter  or  half  turn. 


228  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

5.  Same  as  2,  kneeling  on  one  knee  only,  other  leg  in  rear  of  horse 

6.  Leap  to  kneel ing-mount  as  in  2,  jump,  with  assistance  of  hands, 

to  standing  position  on  horse,  and  jump  off  forward  or  back- 
ward. 

7.  Same  as  in  6.  without  using  hands. 

8.  Leap  to  side-kneeling-mount  on  both  knees;  jump  off  forward, 

facing  about,  and  repeat  the  exercise  again  without  pausing. 

9.  Leap  to  side-kneeling-mount;  jump  off  forward,  face  about;  leap 

to  squatting-mount  on  horse,  and  jump  off  forward. 
10.  Same  mount  as  9;  jump  to  standing  position  on  horse;  jump  off 
forward  with  half  turn;  squat  to  standing  to  position  on  horse 
and  jump  off  forward. 

Third  Series. 
Squatting-mounts  ajifl  shears. 

1.  Leap  to  cross-squatting-mount  on  croup,  on  one  or  both  feet, 

facing  front;  dismount  to  take-off.     Fig.  22, 

2.  Squat  to  standing  position  on  croup,  facing  front;  dismount  right 

or  left,  without  or  with  turn. 

3.  Leap  to  side  squatting-mount  on  croup  on  one  or  both  feet,  fac- 

ing right  or  left,  and  dismount  forward  or  backward. 

4.  Squat  to  standing-position  on  croup,  facing  right  or  left;  jump 

off  forward. 

5.  Leap  to  cross-squatting-mount  on  croup;  (Fig.  22)  extend  legs 

and  body  forward  to  leaning-rest,  and  drop  off  sideward. 
Fig.  23.  ' 

6.  Same  mount  as  5,  straddling  over  neck  from  leaning-rest. 

7.  Same  mount  as  5,  extend  body  and  legs  and  throw  hands  for- 

ward to  rest  on  neck  and  straddle  off  at  once. 


APPARATUS. 


229 


Fig.  22. 


230  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  23. 


APPARATUS.  231 

Fourth  Series. 

1.  Leap  to  standing  position  on  croup,  facing  front;  bend  body  for- 

ward and  leap  off  with  straddle  over  neck. 

2.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup  or  saddle,  facing  front  and 

back-shears. 

3.  Same  mount,  and  repeat  shears  several  times. 

4.  Same  mount,  and  front-shears. 

5.  Repeat  several  times. 

6.  Straddle-mount  on  croup  or  saddle,  facing  front;  leaning-rest  and 

back-shears. 

7.  Same  mount,  leaning-rest;  part  legs  and  drop  to  saddle;  change 

hands  behind  body  and  front-shears.     Repeat  from  leaning- 
rest. 

8.  Same  mount;  leaning-rest;  drop  as  in  7;  front-shears  to  straddle- 

mount,  and  repeat  front-shears  from  straddle-mount  at  once. 

Fifth  Series. 
Pivot-mounts. 

1.  Leap  to  side-rest  on  croup  on  left  side  and  pivot  backvv-ard  to 

straddle-mount  in  saddle  facing  front.     Fig.  24. 

2.  Same,  from  side-rest  on  left  side. 

3.  Leap  and  pivot-mount  on  right  side  at  once. 

4.  Same,  left. 

5.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  left,  right  leg  forward; 

and  pivot  left  leg  forward  to  mount  in  saddle,  facing  rear. 

6.  Same,  left. 

7.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  left,  left  leg  in  front; 

pivot,  circling  left  leg  backward  to  straddle-mount  in  saddle, 
facing  front. 

8.  Leap  to  same  position,  facing  right,  right  leg  in  front;  pivot, 

circling  right  leg  backward  to  straddle-mount  in  saddle,  facing 
front. 


232  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  24. 

9.  Back-shears-mount;  twist  body  right  or  left  and  pivot  forward  to 
straddle-mount  in  saddle,  facing  rear. 

10.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  on  croup,  facing  left,  right  leg  in  front; 

pivot;  left  leg  forward  and  face  to  the  right;  then  right  leg 
forward  and  face  rear. 

11.  Same,  from  same  mount,  facing  in  the  opposite  direction. 


APPARATUS. 


233 


Sixth  Series. 
Free-rest. 


Fig.  25. 

In  the  free-rest  the  legs  are  swung  upward  to  the  rear  until  the 
body  is  horizontal,  arms  extended. 

1.  Leap  to  free-rest,   hands  on  croup,   and  dismount  to  take-off. 

Fig.  25. 

2.  Same,  with  hands  in  saddle,  and  straddle-mount,  facing  front. 

3.  Same,  with  mount  on  knees. 

4.  Same,  with  squatting-mount. 

5.  Same,  with  back-shears-mount. 

6.  Same,  dropping  to  leaning-rest,  and  snap  off  backward. 

7.  Leap  to  free-rest,  hands  in  saddle,  and  drop  off  to  the  right  or  left. 


234  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Seventh  Series. 

Rear-vaults. 

As  a  preliminary  of  these  vaults,  practice  the  leg  circles.  The 
men  should  be  cautioned  to  keep  the  buttocks  close  to  the  horse, 
lean  the  ^Yeight  back,  well  over  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  vault, 
land  keep  the  legs  extended.     Take-off  is  from  both  feet. 


Fig.  26. 

In  the  beginning  the  feet  are  raised  waist  high  only;  later  they 
should  be  raised  to  the  height  of  the  chest,  the  head,  and  finally 
higher  than  the  head. 

1.  Rear- vault  right.     Fig.  26. 

2.  Rear- vault  left. 

3.  Same  exercises,  facing  the  horse,  or  about. 


APPARATUS. 


235 


Flanh-vaults. 

The  flank-vaults  do  not  differ  materially  from  those  of  the  side 
horse,  except  that  the  hands  are  placed  in  a  different  position.  In 
the  flank-vaults  to  the  right,  the  right  hand  is  placed  close  to  the 


Fig. 27 


end  of  the  croup,  fingers  turned  toward  the  take-off;  the  left  hand  is 
thrown  forward  well  over  to  the  right  of  the  croup,  fingers  turned  in 
the  direction  of  the  vault. 

4.  Flank-vault  right.     Fig.  27. 

5.  Same,  left. 

6.  Flank- vault  right,  facing  rear. 

7.  Flank- vault  left,  facing  rear. 


236 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Eighth  Series. 
Front-vaults. 
This  is  the  most  difficult  of  these  vaults, 
as  for  the  flank-vaults. 
1.  Front-vault  right.     Fig.  28. 


The  support  is  the  same 


Fig.  28. 

The  movement  begins  on  the  left  side,  the  legs  being  swung 
obliquely  backward  to  the  left  first,  and  then  the  whole  body, 
face  down,  extended  as  it  is  on  the  side  horse,  is  pivoted  on 
the  right  arm  until  it  faces  to  the  rear  where  the  dismount  takea 
place. 

Same,  left. 

Front- vault  right,  with  turn,  facing  horse. 


4.  Same,  left. 


APPARATUS.  237 

Stride-vaults. 

In  these  exercises  one  leg  is  circled  over  the  croup  and  joined  to 
the  other  leg  before  alighting.  The  circle  is  a  horizontal  one  and 
must  be  executed  with  snap,  else  it  will  fail  to  catch  up  with  the 
other  leg,  which  has  a  shorter  distance  to  cover.  Legs  must  be 
extended. 

5.  Stride-vault  with  right  leg  (dismount  on  left  side  of  horse,  facing 

front.) 

6.  Same,  with  left  leg. 

7.  Same,  with  the  right,  turning  to  the  right  and  facing  the  horse. 

8.  Same,  with  the  left. 

9.  Same,  right  or  left,  facing  about. 

Ninth  Series. 

Straddle-vaults. 

In  the  following  vaults  the  horse  is  cleared  lengthwise.  When  the 
support  is  on  the  neck,  the  vault  is  more  easily  acquired  if  the  legs 
are  slightly  beyond  the  horizontal  in  the  rear  when  the  hands  land 
on  the  horse.  This  position  drives  the  body  forward ;  if  the  legs  are 
below  the  horizontal,  the  weight  is  dragged  back.  The  men  must  be 
cautioned  not  to  throw  the  head  back  before  the  hands  are  released, 
because  if  they  do  a  strained  back  is  the  result.  Assistance  should 
be  given  in  these  long  jumps,  and  it  is  best  rendered  by  a  man 
standing  close  enough  to  catch  hold  of  the  arm  of  the  one  exercising, 
and  yet  not  interfering  unless  his  assistance  is  required.  As  a  pre- 
liminary the  men  should  be  made  to  execute  every  exercise  to  the 
mount  on  the  neck  first. 

1.  Straddle- vault  over  horse,  support  on  saddle  and  then  on  neck. 

2.  Straddle-vault,  support  one  hand  on  saddle  and  the  other  on  neck. 

3.  Same,  with  support  on  one  hand  on  croup,  the  other  on  the  neck. 

4.  Straddle-vault,  support  on  neck,  both  hands  forward  as  far  as 

possible,  fingers  over  end  of  horse.     Fig.  29. 


238 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  29. 


HIGH    HORIZONTAL     BARS— HORIZON- 
TAL YAULTING  BARS. 


HORIZONTAL  BAR  EXERCISES. 

As  the  object  of  the  following  exercises  is  not  the  development  of 
gymnastic  proficiency,  only  such  simple  movements  are  prescribed 
that  will  develop  and  bring  into  play  those  muscle  groups  upon 
which  a  soldier  must  depend  in  successfully  overcoming  obstacles 
that  may  present  themselves  to  him  in  the  field. 

The  bar  should  be  placed  high  enough  to  allow  the  soldier  to  hang 
in  the  extended-arm  hang  without  touching  the  ground  or  floor  with 
his  toes.  In  the  absence  of  a  regular  bar  one  may  be  improvised  of 
two  by -four  scantling,  edges  being  rounded  to  permit  a  firm  grip. 

The  grips  used  in  thesQ  various  exercises  are: 

(a)  Ordinary  grip;  Knuckles  turned  to  the  rear,  thumbs  around 
bar. 

(6)  Reversed  grip;  Knuckles  turned  forward,  thumbs  around  bar, 

(c)  Combined  grip;  A  combination  of  the  two. 

First  Series. 

1.  Leap      to     extended-side-arm-hang— ordinary     grip;     LEAP. 
DROP. 

Assume  the  position  of  attention  directly  under  the  bar;  at 
Leap  spring  upward,  swing  the  arms  forward  and  upward, 
grasping  the  bar  with  the  ordinary  grip  and  hang  with  arms 
extended.  In  this  position  the  body  is  held  as  follows:  He^d 
erect;  arms  extended;  distance  between  hands  width  of  hips; 
back  arched  slightly;  legs  extended  and  closed;  toes  together 
and  depressed.  At  Drop  release  the  hands,  swing  the  arms 
to  the  sides  without  bending  them;  light  on  toes,  bending 
knees,  and  resume  the  position  of  attention  smartly.     Fig.  1. 

239 


240 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


2.  Repeat  several  times,  assuming  the  position  of  attention  each 

time. 

3.  Repeat  several  times,  leaping  back  to  the  hang  immediately  after 

dropping. 


Fig. 1. 

4.  Repeat  1,  2,  and  3  with  reversed  grip. 

5.  Repeat  1,  2,  and  3,  hanging  crosswise,  right  (left)  hand  in  front. 

6.  Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip,  at  one  side  of 

bar,  and  travel  sideward,  hand  after  hand. 

7.  Same,  traveling  sideward,  hand  over  hand. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS.  241 

Second  Series. 

8.  Same,  traveling  sideward,  moving  both  hands  simultaneously. 

9.  Repeat  above  exercises  with  reversed  grip. 

10.  Repeat,  in  the  cross-hang,  traveling  forward  or  backward. 


Fig.  2. 

Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  right  hand  ordinary  and  left 
.hand  in  reversed  grip;  release  right  hand,  turn  right  about 
on  left  arm,  replace  right  hand  in  reversed  grip,  and  turn 
left  about  on  right  arm;  replace  left  hand  in  ordinary  grip. 

Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip,  in  middle  of  bar; 
change  to  stretch  hang,  moving  first  one  and  then  the  other 
hand  outward;  return  to  original  position.     Fig.  2. 

31853°— 14 IG 


242  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Third  Series. 

1.  Leap  to  extended-si  de-arm-hang,  ordinary-  grip;  change  right  to 

reverse  grip;  then  left;  right  back  to  ordinary  grip;  then  left. 

2.  Same,  from  reversed  grip  to  ordinary  grip  and  back  again. 


Fig.  3. 

Leap  as  in  1;  change  right  and  then  left  hand  to  reversed  grip; 

change  both  hands  at  same  time  to  ordinary  grip. 
Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  reversed  grip;  change  hand 

after  hand  to  ordinary  grip,  and  both  back  to  reversed  grip. 
Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip;   change   both 

simultaneously  to  reversed  grip,  and  back  again  to  ordinary 

grip. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 


243 


The  tendency  in  these  exercises  is  to  move  the  legs  when 
the  hands  are  being  changed.  This  can  be  overcome  if  the 
body  is  drawn  up  slightly  and  the  change  made  while  the 
arms  are  slightly  bent. 


Fig.  4. 

Fourth  Series. 

6.  Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip;  raise  and  lower 

heel  or  heels;  knees  remain  closed. 

7.  Same,  raising  knee  or  knees  forward.     Fig.  3. 

8.  Same,  straddling  and  closing  legs  sideward. 

9.  Same,  raising  one  leg  forward  horizontally. 

10.  Same,  raising  one  knee  and  then  extending  leg  forward. 

11.  Same  as  10.  with  both  legs.     Fig.  4. 


244 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fifth  Series. 

1.  Leap   to  extended-side-arm-hang,   ordinary  grip,   and  slightly 

bend  and  extend  arms  (rocking  movement)  alternately. 

2.  Leap  as  in  1,  and  draw  body  to  bent-arm-hang,  and  drop  from 

that  position.     Fig.  5. 

3.  Same  as  2,  extending  arms  and  then  dropping. 

4.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip,  at  once,  and  drop.     Fig.  5. 

5.  Same,  with  reversed  grip. 


"vir-^ 

Sl^^i 

^^^m   y 

i 

1 

Fig. 


Fig.  6. 


Sixth  Series. 
6.  Leap  to  bent-knee-instep-balance-hang. 

To  assume  this  position,   leap  to  the  bent-arm-hang  with 
knees  raised;  pass  knees  between  arms  until  insteps  touch 
front  of  bar,  at  the  same  time  extend  the  arms;  lower  legs  and  i 
drop.     Fig.  G. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS.  245 

7.  Execute  6  without  pausing;  also  with  reversed  grip. 

8.  Leap  to  bent-knee-heel-balance-hang.     This  position  is  exactly 

like  6,  except  that  the  heels  touch  the  rear  of  bar. 


Fig. 7. 

9.  Leap  to  extended-side-arm-hang  backward,   i.   e.,   execute  8; 
turn  body  through  between  arms  and  extend  knees  downward ; 
release  hands  and  drop.     Fig.  7. 
10.  Same  as  9,  but  return  by  drawing  the  legs  back  between  the  arms 
to  extended-side-arm-hang  forward  and  drop. 


246 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Seventh  Series. 

Leap  to  right-oiiter-knee-hang.    Fig.  8. 

To  assume  this  position,  execute  the  bent-knee-instep- 
balance-hang  (6,  Sixth  Series)  first;  then  pass  the  right  foot 
under  and  then  over  the  bar  outside  of  hand  and  rest  leg  on 
bar  under  knee,  toes  are  extended  and  leg  is  horizontal;  left 
leg  is  extended  forward  horizontally;  arms  extended.  Return 
in  reverse  order  and  drop. 


f  ^N^^^      p-*^ 


Fig. S. 

2.  Leap   to  inner-knee-hang  on  right  knee,   leg  between  hands. 

Fig.  9. 

3.  Execute  1  and  2  with  left  leg. 

4.  Leap  to  inner-knee-hang  on  both  knees,  knees  between  hands. 

Fig.  10. 

5.  Leap  to  outer-knee-hang  on  both  knees,  knees  outside  of  hand. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 


247 


Fig.  9. 


Fig.  10. 


248 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 
Eighth  Series. 


1 .  Leap  to  outer-knee-hang  (Fig.  8)  and  swing  forward  and  backward . 

2.  Leap  to  inner-knee-hang;  swing  forward  and  backward. 

Assume  an  outer  or  inner-knee-hang,  and  in  that  position 
sA\'ing  backward  and  forward.     The  swing  is  gained  by  raising 


'""^^Smmtk. 

^^S! 

Fig. 11. 

the  extended  leg  close  to  the  bar  and  then  forcing  it  downward, 
without  bending  it,  as  far  as  possible.  Every  time  the  body 
swings  to  the  front  this  leg  repeats  the  movement.  To  return 
to  the  extended-arm-hang,  release  the  hanging  knee  just  as  the 
highest  point  of  the  forward  swing  is  reached  and  join  it  to  the 
other  leg. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS.  249 

Front-outer-knee-swing,    to   bent-arm    and   thigh-rest,  Fig.  11; 
swing  back  to  knee-hang;  lower  legs  and  drop. 

In  this  exercise  the  arms  draw  the  body  toward  the  bar,  and 
when  sufficient  swing  has  been  gained  the  extended  leg  is 
forced  down  hard  when  the  body  is  about  to  be  raised  upon  the 


Fig.  12. 


bar.     To  return,  the  body  is  lowered  slowly  to  the  knee-hang 
and  the  hanging  knee  released. 

4.  Same  as  3,  extending  arms  from  the  bent  to  the  extended-arm  and 

thigh-rest  on  the  bar.     Fig.  12. 

5.  Same  exercise,  but  swing  up  at  once  to  the  extended-rest. 

6.  Same  as  3,  4,  and  5,  from  inner-knee-hang. 


250 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


NixTH  Series. 

1.  Leap    to    bent-arm-hang,    hands    reversed,    "vrith    knees   raised. 

Fig.  13. 

2.  Leap  as  above  and  immediately  extend  knees  and  front-circle-up- 

swing, Fig.  14,  to  bent-arm-rest  on  bar.     Fig.  15. 

As  the  knees  are  extended  the  legs  are  thro^vn  over  the  bar 
and  the  body  is  circled  backward  to  the  bent-arm-rest;  and 
turn  over  to  the  hanc:. 


Fig.  13. 


Fig. 14. 


3.  Same,  going  from  bent  to  extended-arm-rest.  Fig.  16;  bend  arms 

and  tiim  over. 

4.  Same,  going  to  the  extended-arm-rest  at  once. 

5.  Eepeat,  with  the  ordinary  grip. 

6.  Eepeat  any  of  the  above  and  lower  body  slowly  to  the  bent  and 

then  to  the  extended-arm-hang. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 


251 


Fig.  15. 


Fig.  16. 


252 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


1. 


Texth  iSeries. 
to  bent-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip. 


Leap  to  bent-arm-hang,  ordinary  grip,  and  raise  right  forearm 
over  bar  to  elbow-hang  on  right  arm;  return  to  the  extended- 
hang,  and  drop. 
2.  Same  with  the  left  arm. 


Fig. i: 


Fig.  is. 


Same,  raising  first  the  right  and  then  the  left  forearm  to  elbovr- 

hang-on  both  arms;  change  to  the  extended-hang,   mo^-ing 

both  arms  simultaneously.     Fig.  17. 
Same,  mo^dng  both  arms  over  the  bar  at  once. 
Pull  the  body  up  from  the  extended  to  the  bent-arm-hang  and 

repeat  from  1  to  4. 
From  the  arm-liang.  Fig.  17,  raise  the  right  elbow  and  then  the 

left  elbow  to  the  bent-arm-rest,  Fig.  15,  and  extend  both  arms 

to  the  extended-arm-rest.  Fig,  16,     Fig.  IS. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS.  263 


HORIZONTAL,  VAULTING  BAR. 

For  beginners  and  for  general  use  the  bar  should  be  about  3  feet 
6  inches  high;  later  proficiency  should  determine  the  height. 

»       First  Lessox. 

1.  Leap  to  extended-arm-rest,  ordinary  grip.     Fig.  IG. 

While  in  the  extended-arm-rest  execute: 

2.  Raising  and  lowering  heel  or  heels. 

3.  Straddle  and  close  legs  sideward. 

4.  Eaise  leg  backward  horizontallj-. 

5.  Same  sideward. 

6.  Travel  sideward,  right  (lett),  hand  after  hand. 

Second  Lessox, 

1.  Leap  to  back-extended-arm-rest.     Fig.  19. 

Right  hand  grasps  bar  opposite  left  shoulder;  in  leaping,  face 
left  about  and  grasp  bar  with  left  hand. 

2.  Same,  facing  right  about. 

3.  In  the  back-rest,  execute  the  various  leg  exercises.     Dismount  by 

dropping  off  or  by  swinging  off. 

The  dismount  or  drop  from  the  above  exercise  may  be  the 
ordinary  drop  from  the  rest;  from  the  rest  with  legs  or  body  in 
any  of  the  positions  described  above;  or  the  body  may  be 
swung  off  backrward. 

4.  Leap  and  raise  leg  over  bar  to  outer-tliigh-mount,  knee  bent. 

5.  Same,  with  knee  extended.     Fig.  20. 

6.  Inner-thigh-mount,  leg  bent;  leg  passes  under  hand. 

7.  Same,  with  leg  extended.     Fig.  21. 


254 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 19. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 


866 


'^^^M 

1 

i^l^^^l^^^'' ^- 

Fig.  20. 


Fig.  21. 


256  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Third  Lesson. 

1 .  Circle  ri^ht  leg  invrard.  under  right  hand,  to  thigh-mount,  Fig.  21, 

faring  front;  leg  is  extended  downward;  return  to  the  stand 
by  circling  the  leg  back  under  right  hand. 

2.  Same  with  the  left  leg. 

3.  Same  as  1  and  2,  but  circling  the  leg  backward  under  opposite 

hand  to  the  stand. 

4.  Circle  right  leg  outward,  under  the  left  hand,  to  the  thigh-mount 

as  in  1,  and  dismount  by  swinging  the  leg  backward  under  the 
opposite  hand  or  the  hand  on  the  same  side, 

5.  Circle  right  leg  inward  as  in  1;  pause  in  the  mount  only  momen- 

tarily and  complete  circle  under  left  hand. 

6.  Same  with  left  leg. 

7.  Circle  right  leg  outward  as  in  4.;  pause  in  the  mount  momentarily 

and  complete  circle  under  right  hand. 

Fourth  Lesson. 

1.  Circle  right  leg  forward,  under  right  or  left  hand,  to  inner-thigh- 

mount,  knee  bent;  reverse  right  hand  and  dismount  on  oppo- 
site side  of  bar,  facing  to  the  right,  by  raising  the  left  leg 
forward.     Fig.  22. 

2.  Same,  with  the  left  leg. 

3.  Circle  right  leg  and  then  left  leg  forward  to  the  back-rest  and 

drop  or  swing  off  forward. 

4.  Same  as  3,  from  the  back-rest  the  legs  are  circled  backward  again 

to  the  front-rest;  drop  or  swing  off  backward. 

5.  Leap  to  back-rest  Fig.  19,  and  circle  legs  backward  to  front-rest 

and  forward  to  back-rest. 

6.  Circle  right  leg  forward,  imder  right  or  left  hand;  face  about  and 

circle  left  leg  backward  to  the  stand. 

7.  Same,  with  the  left  leg. 


HIGH  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 


257 


Fig.  22. 


318.53°— 14 17 


258  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Fifth  Lesson. 

1.  Leap  to  extended-arm-rest,  right  hand  reversed,  and  swing  le 

over  bar  on  left  to  the  stand,  facing  right. 

2.  Same  on  the  opposite  side. 

3.  Flank-vault  right.     (-Se^ Side  horse.)  , 

4.  Same  on  the  left. 

5.  Rear- vault  on  the  right.     {See  Side  horse.) 

6.  Same  on  the  left. 

7.  Front-vault  on  the  right.     {See  Side  horse.) 

8.  Same  on  the  left. 

Sixth  Lesson. 

1.  Squatting-vault,  releasing  right  hand. 

2.  Same,  releasing  left  hand. 

3.  Squatting-vault,  releasing  both  hands. 

4.  Flank-vault  right,  with  \  turn  left. 

5.  Same  on  opposite  side. 

6.  Rear-vault  on  the  right,  with  \  turn  right. 

7.  Same  on  opposite  side. 

8.  Front- vault  on  the  right,  with  \  turn  left. 

9.  Same  on  opposite  side. 

Seventh  Lesson. 

1.  Squatting-vault,  with  \  turn  right  or  left. 

2.  Same,  with  \  turn. 

3.  Rear- vault  right,  facing  bar,  and  squatting  vault. 

4.  Same,  left. 

5.  Rear- vault  as  in  3,  right  or  left,  and  flank-vault  right  or  left. 

6.  Rear-vault  as  in  3,  right  or  left,  and  front-vault  right  or  left. 

7.  Rear-vault  as  in  3,  right  or  left,  and  rear-vault  right  or  left. 

8.  Squatting-vault  as  in  2,  and  rear,  flank,  or  front-A^ault. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


In  the  following  series  all  movements  of  a  slow  and  cumbersome 
nature,  the  so-called  strength  exercises,  and  those  in  which  con- 
siderable continued  strain  is  thrown  upon  the  upper  back,  chest  and 
arm  muscles,  have  been  eliminated;  instead,  only  such  that  make  for 
activity  and  agility  and  in  which  the  support  of  the  body  upon  the 
arms  is  only  momentary  are  prescribed.  In  many  respects  these 
exercises  are  very  similar  to  those  on  'the  horses  and  vaulting  bars, 
and,  like  these,  their  greatest  value  lies  in  quick  and  speedy  execu- 
tion. All  of  the  prescribed  exercises  are  well  within  the  capabilities 
of  men  of  ordinary  strength. 

The  series  should  first  be  practiced  on  bars  4  feet  high,  the  height 
being  gradually  increased  to  5  feet  as  the  proficiency  of  the  men 
increases.  The  width  of  the  bars  should  equal  the  width  of  the 
shoulders  of  the  average  man  of  the  squad. 

First  Series. 

arm-rest  and  exercises  in  the  rest. 

1.  To  the  extended  cross-arm-rest— 1.  Ready,  2.  LEAP,  3.  DROP. 
The  position  of  attention  is  assumed  at  arm's  length  from  the 
ends  of  the  bars.  At  Ready  the  arms  are  raised  forward 
between  the  bars  and  th^  hands  are  placed  upon  the  ends  of 
the  bars,  knuckles  turned  inward  slightly,  and  the  body  is 
raised  on  toes.  At  Leap  spring  upward  into  the  rest.  In 
that  position  the  head  is  erect,  shoulders  square,  chest  out, 
arms  extended,  back  arched  slightly,  legs  straight  and  closed, 
toes  together  and  depressed.  At  Drop  the  body  is  permitted 
to  drop  back  to  the  take-off  without  bending  arms,  hands 
being  turned  in  slightly,  light  on  toes,  bend  knees  slightly, 

259 


260  MANTTAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

and  as  these  are  extending  drop  arms  to  the  sides  smartly  and 
resume  the  position  of  attention.     Fig.  1. 

2.  Repeat  above  exercise  several  times. 

3.  Repeat,  going  back  to  the  rest  without  resuming  the  position  of 

attention. 


Fig.  1. 


In  the  extended-arm-rest: 

4.  Raise  and  lower  heel  or  heels. 

5.  Raise  and  lower  knee  or  knees. 

6.  Side  or  cross  straddle  legs.    - 


Fig.  2. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


861 


Fig.  2. 


262  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Second  Series. 

1.  Raise  knee  and  extend  leg  forward.     Fig.  3. 

2.  Turn  body  right  or  left. 

3.  Turn  body  right  and  then  left  about. 


Fig.  3. 

4.  Raise  hands  alternately,  marking  time. 

5.  Move  right  hand  forward,  three  movements,  to  stretch-rest,  and 

back  again.     Same,  left.     Fig.  4. 

6.  Travel  forward,  hands  alternating,  three  to  five  movements,  and 

drop  between  bars,  facing  right  or  left. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


263 


i 


Fig.  4. 


264  MANUAL   OF  PH-XSICAL   TRAINING. 

Third  Series. 

From  the  stand  to  the  stand: 
1.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars.     Fig.  5. 

Knees  are  extended,  toes  depressed,  trunk  and  head  erect, 
arms  straight,  and  legs  almost  at  right  angles  to  the  body. 


Fig.  5. 

2.  Straddle-mount  on  one  bar.     Fig.  6. 

Legs  are  closed  under  the  bar. 

3.  Oblique-mount  on  right  or  left  bar.     Legs  closed. 

4.  Side-mount  on  right  or  left  bar,  facing  right  or  left. 


Fig. 
Fig 


7. 
.8. 


PARALLEL  BARS.  265 

5.  Change  from  one  of  the  various  mounts  to  any  other. 

In  these  changes  the  legs  are  swung  up  and  then  in  the 
direction  of  the  mount. 


Fig.  6. 


Leap  to  the  extended-arm-rest  and  from  there  execute  the  various 
mounts,  going  back  to  the  rest  before  dropping  back  to  the 
take-off. 


266  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  7. 


PAEALIEL  BAES. 


sev 


Fig.  8. 


268  MANTJAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fourth  Series. 

1.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  change  hands  forward  and  swing 

legs  forward  to  the  straddle- mount;  repeat  to  end  of  bars  and 
drop  off,  facing  right  or  left. 

2.  Change  forward  in  the  same  manner  from  the  straddle-mount  on 

one  bar;  from  the  oblique  or  from  the  side-mount. 

3.  Oblique-mount  on  right  bar;  change  hands  to  left  bar,  and  circle 

right  leg  forward  to  straddle-mount,  facing  rear;  snap-off 
forward  right.     Fig.  9. 

In  the  snap-off  both  legs  are  swung  up  and  then  moved  in  the 
direction  indicated. 

4.  Oblique-mount  on  right  bar;  change  hands  to  left  and  circle  right 

leg  over  right  bar,  then  between  bars  and  then  forward  to 
straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  snap-off  right  or  left. 

5.  Oblique-moimt  on  right  bar;  face  left  about  to  oblique-mount  on 

same  bar,  facing  rear;  circle  left  leg  forward  to  straddle-mount, 
facing  take-off,  hands  in  front  of  body,  and  dismount  to 
take-off. 

6.  Oblique-mount  on  right  bar,  circle  right  leg  forward  to  straddle 

mount  on  both  bars,  facing  left,  right  knee  bent;  pivot  left 
leg  forward  to  straddle-mount  on  both  bars,  facing  rear,  and 
snap-off. 

7.  Oblique-moimt  on  left  bar;  circle  left  leg  forward  as  in  6. 

The  hand  upon  which  the  weight  rests  is  always  upon  the 
bar  opposite  to  the  one  upon  which  the  supporting  thigh  rests. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


Fig.  9. 


270  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fifth  Series. 

1.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars,  and  snap-off  right  or  left  without  or 

with  turns. 

2.  Same  from  straddle-mounts  on  one  bar,  snapj^ing  off  over  opposite 

bar. 

3.  Same  from  oblique-mounts. 

4.  Same  from  side-mounts. 

5.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  change  hands  forward  and  snap-off 

backward  without  or  with  turns. 

6.  Same  from  straddle-mount  on  one  bar,  on  the  same  or  opposite 

side. 

7.  Same  as  6  from  oblique-mounts. 

8.  Same  as  7  from  side-mounts. 

Sixth  Series. 

1.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  change  hands  forward;  swing  legs 

forward;  vault  forward  without  turning.     Fig.  10. 

2.  Same,  from  the  straddle-mounts  on  one  bar,  the  oblique-mounts, 

or  side-mounts. 

3.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  change  hands  forward  and  swing  legs 

forward  and  backward,  and  vault  backward,  right  or  left. 

4.  Same  from  the  various  other  mounts. 

5.  Execute  1  and  2  with  quarter  or  half  turn  toward  bars. 

6.  Execute  3  and  4  with  quarter  or  half  turn  away  from  bars. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


271 


Fig.  10. 


272  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Seventh  Series. 

1.  Oblique-mount  right  or  left;  change  to  the  front-leaning-rest,  and 

dismount  backward  right  or  left.     Fig.  11. 

From  the  oblique-mount  on  the  right  bar  the  right  foot  is 
placed  on  the  left  bar  and  the  body  is  turned.  Tha  left  foot  is 
placed  on  the  right  bar,  the  hands  are  on  the  ends  of  the  bars, 
facing  the  take-off.  In  this  position  the  arms  and  legs  are 
extended,  shoulders  well  over  hands;  the  feet  rest  on  the 
inside  of  the  instep.  To  dismount,  drop  off  to  the  right  or 
left. 

2.  Straddle-mount  on  both  bars;  change  hands  forward,  and  swing 

forward  to  straddle-mount;  change  to  front-leaning-rest  by 
swinging  backward,  and  dismount  backward  right  or  left. 

3.  Stand  between  bars;  leap  to  extended-arm-rest  in  middle,  and 

swing  backward  to  front-leaning-rest. 

Having  assumed  the  front-leaning-rest  by  means  of  one  of 
the  various  methods  described  above,  execute  the  following 
exercises : 

4.  Bend  and  extend  arms.     Fig.  12. 

5.  Draw  legs  to  squatting-position  and  extend  again.     Fig.  13. 

6.  Place  both  hands  on  one  and  both  feet  on  the  other  bar.     Fig.  14. 

7.  Bend  arms  and  lower  elbows,  resting  on  upper  arms.     To  recover, 

raise  first  one  elbow  and  then  the  other.     Fig.  15. 

8.  Same  as  7,  recover  by  raising  both  elbows  simultaneously. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


273 


Fig.  11. 


318.53°— 14 18 


274  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  12. 


■yiiMiiiii    I     III  I       mill     P  ■III  III I  liiiMii  milMil— iPIWWPBg*^^"^" 

J/  ,       r^Jk  I  ...^ a 


Fig.  13. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


275 


Fig.  14. 


Fig.  15. 


276 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Eighth  Series. 

Straddle-mount  on  both  bars ;  change  to  back-leaning-rest;  change 
to  straddle-mount,  and  snap-off.     Fig.  16. 

The  feet,  outside  of  insteps  touching,  are  placed  on  the  bars 
and  the  body  is  raised  until  the  back  is  well  arched;  arms 
remain  extended. 


ijf 

-.p- 

\ 

n 

^^K^^^^^^^^^K    ^Sk 

^^^^^^^ 

^^P/^^ 

Hi 

Fig. 16. 


2.  Swing  to  the  back-leaning-rest  from  the  straddle-mount,  hands 

forward,  at  the  end  or  in  the  middle  of  bars. 
In  that  position  execute  the  following  exercises: 

3.  Bend  and  extend  body.     Figs.  17  and  16. 

4.  Swing  from  back  to  front-leaning-rest  and  reverse. 

5.  Vault  backward  right  or  left  with  swings,  from  the  leaning-rests. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


277 


Fig.  17. 


278  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


XiXTH  Series. 

Position  in  the  middle;  bars  shoulder  high. 

1.  Leap  to  upper-arm-hang  and  drop  between  bars.     Fig.  18. 

In  that  position  the  arms,  elbows  slightly  bent,  are  thrown 
over  the  bars,  hands  grasping  the  bars  firmly;  legs  are  closed, 
toes  depressed;  back  is  arched  slightly;  shoulders  square  and 
head  erect.  In  dismounting  the  hands  are  turned  inward  and 
the  arms  are  dropped  smartly  as  the  knees  are  extending. 
In  that  position  execute: 

2.  Various  leg  exercises. 

3.  Swing  legs  backward  and  forward,  dismounting  at  the  end  of  rear 

swing. 

4.  Swing  as  in  3  to  back-thigh  and  arm-rest.     Fig.  19. 

Legs  are  straddled  over  bars  in  forward  swing,  body  and  legs 
extended;  swing  legs  backward  and  dismount  at  end  of  rear 
swing,  between  bars. 

5.  Same,  to  front-thigh  and  arm-rest.     Fig.  20. 

Legs  are  straddled  over  bars  in  rear  .swing;  close  legs  and 
dismount  between  bars. 

6.  Same  in  rear  and  front  swing. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 


279 


Fig.  18. 


280 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 19. 


Fig.  20. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 

Tenth  Series. 


281 


Fig.  21. 

S\ving  as  in  3  to  overhead-balance.     Fig.  21. 

Legs  are  swung  over  head  until  head  and  knees  are  close 
together  and  a  balance  may  be  maintained  without  much 
effort. 


282  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

2.  Swing  to  back-thigh  and  arm-rest;  Fig.  19,  change  to  straddle- 

mount  on  the  bai-s  and  snap  or  vault  off. 

3.  Swing  to  front-thigh  and  arm-rest;  Fig.  20,  draw  legs  forward  to 

straddle-mount  and  snap  or  vault  off. 


Fig.  22. 

4.  Execute  1  and  roll  to  straddle-mount  in  front  of  hands  and  snap 

or  vault  off. 
o.  Swing  and  raise  body  to  straddle-mount  at  end  of  rear  swing. 

Snap  or  vault  off. 
6.  Upper-arm-hang,  draw  body  forward  to  hands;  raise  right  elbow, 

then  left  and  extend  arms  to  extended-arm-rest,  and  drop 

backward  between  bars.     Fig.  22. 


PARALLEL  BARS.  283 

Eleventh  Series. 

The  following  exercises  will  be  executed  from  the  take-off,  and 
the  dismount  will  be  back  to  the  take-off.     Height  of  bars,  4  feet. 

1.  Leap  to  momentary  rest  on  hands  and  circle  right  leg  backward 

under  right  hand  to  the  take-off. 

2.  Same  with  left  leg. 

3.  Same  with  right  and  follow  immediately  with  the  left  leg. 

4.  Leap  and  circle  right  leg  forward  over  end  of  bar  under  right 

hand  to  momentary  rest  and  drop  to  take-off. 

5.  Same  with  left  leg. 

6.  Same  with  right  and  follow  immediately  with  the  left  leg. 

Twelfth  Series. 

1.  Circle  right  leg  forward;  drop  to  take-off,  and  circle  left  backward. 

2.  Same  forward  left  or  backward  right. 

3.  Same  as  1  and  2  in  reverse  order,  i.  e.,  right  backward  and  left 

forward;  left  backward  and  right  forward. 

4.  Circle  right  leg  forward  over  right  bar  to  the  oblique-mount  on 

the  left  bar;  snap-off. 

In  this  exercise  both  legs  are  moved  forward  simultane- 
ously, the  right  on  the  outside  of  the  bars,  the  right  outside 
of  the  right  bar  and  the  left  between  the  bars.  The  body  is 
inclined  to  the  left  and  the  weight  is  entirely  on  the  left  arm 
immediately  after  the  feet  leave  the  take-off. 

5.  Same  with  the  left  leg  to  the  oblique-mount  on  the  right  bar. 

6.  Leap  and  straddle  both  legs  over  ends  of  bars  to  the  straddle- 

mount  behind  the  hands;  change  hands  and  snap-off  right  or 
left. 

As  the  feet  leave  the  take-off  the  legs  are  separated  and  the 
•arms  thrust  the  body  up  and  forward;  the  hands  moving 
forward;  when  the  mount  is  completed  the  hands  are 
changed  to  the  rear. 

7.  Same  as  6,  decreasing  the  interval  between  changes  of  hands  and 

the  mount  and  dismount  as  much  as  possible. 


284  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Thirteen'th  Series. 

From  the  stand  on  the  take-off: 

1.  Vault  forward  right. 

2.  Same  to  the  left. 

3.  Same  right  and  left  to  the  stand,  facing  the  bars. 

4.  Same  to  the  right  and  left;  to  the  stand,  facing  away  from  bars. 

5.  Vault  forward  right  to  stand,  facing  left  about. 

6.  Same  to  the  left,  facing  right  about. 

7.  Same  to  the  right,  facing  right  about. 

8.  Same  to  the  left,  facing  left  about. 

Fourteenth  Series. 

Repeat  the  vaults  prescribed  in  the  thirteenth  series  with  a  run- 
ning start  of  about  6  paces;  the  take-off  is  moved  about  a  foot  from 
the  ends  of  the  bars  and  the  jump  is  from  both  feet;  the  support 
is  on  the  ends  of  the  bars. 

Fifteenth  Series. 

Repeat  the  thirteenth  series  with  a  running  start  as  in  the  four- 
teenth series,  the  support  being  in  the  middle  of  the  bars. 

In  leaping  from  the  take-off  the  arms  must  be  swung  forward  and 
upward  between  the  bars,  not  over  them.     Fig.  23. 

1.  Leap  to  straddle-mount  in  middle  of  bars  behind  hands;  change 

hands  behind  body  and  s\nng  backward  and  vault  backward 
over  right  bar.     Fig.  24. 

2.  Same,  left. 

3.  Same,  right  or  left  to  stand,  facing  bar. 

4.  Leap  to  extended-arm-rest  in  middle  of  bars  and  swing  backward 

and  vault  backward  as  in  1. 

5.  Same  to  the  left. 

6.  Same  to  the  right  or  left  to  stand,  facing  bars. 


PARALLEL  BARS. 

Sixteenth  Series. 


285 


From  the  stand  on  the  take-off: 

1.  Repeat  4  and  5  of  the  Twelfth  Series,  to  the  right  and  left. 

2.  Circle  left  leg  forward  over  left  bar,  and  vault  forward  to  the 

risrht. 


Fig.  23. 

The  left  leg  is  swung  for^vard  over  the  left  bar  and  the  right 
leg  between  the  bars,  and  both  legs  then  passing  over  the 
right  bar  to  stand,  facing  to  the  front.  The  body  must  be 
sharply  inclined  to  the  right  and  the  support  must  be  on  the 
right  arm  the  moment  the  feet  leave  the  take-off. 

Same  to  the  left. 

Same  to  the  right,  facing  the  bar. 

Same  to  the  left,  facing  the  bar. 


286 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


IhI'                 i    m- 

■ .  1  IT:/ 

■ 

if2- ' 

I 

Fig.  24, 


RINGS. 


Rings  should  be  hung  on  adjustable  straps,  which  will  allow  them 
to  be  used  at  any  height,  from  height  of  chest  to  jumping  height. 
Circular  rings  whose  inside  diameter  is  about  7  inches — outside  an 
inch  and  a  quarter  more — are  the  best  for  all  purposes. 

Exercises  on  Rings  at  Height  of  Chest. 
First  Series, 

In  all  ring  exercises  the  hands  grasp  the  rings  with  knuckles 
turned  out,  the  side  of  the  rings  being  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the 
body. 

From  the  stand  between  the  rings: 

1.  Lower  body  to  back-extended-arm-leaning-hang.     Fig.  1. 

2.  Lower  body  to  front-extended-arm-leaning-hang.     Fig.  2, 

3.  Lower  as  in  2;  and  from  there  to  position  1. 

4.  Lower  to  side-extended-arm-leaning-hang,  right  or  left.     Fig.  3. 

5.  Change  from  right  side-leaning-hang  to  the  same  position  on  the 

left. 

6.  From  back-extended-leaning-hang  continue  to  circle  body  right 

or  left. 


288 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Fig. 1. 


RINGS. 


Fig.  2. 


31853°— 14 19 


290  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 3. 


RINGS. 

Second  Series. 


291 


Fig.  4. 

1.  From  the  stand  between  rings,  leap  and  turn  over  backward  to 

the  back-stand,  and  forward  again  to  original  position. 

2.  Raise  knee  or  leg  forward. 

3.  Bend  and  extend  arms. 

4.  Turn  body  right  or  left. 

5.  Bend  body  at  waist  and  extend. 

6.  Leap  to  the  inverted-hang.     Fig.  4. 

Legs  between  ropes,  head  down. 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Third  Series. 


Fig.  5. 


1.  Inverted-hang;  slightly  bend  and  extend  arms,  feet  against  ropes. 

2.  Leap  to  nest-hang.     Fig.  5. 

Insert  feet  in  rings  and  turn  body  through  until  back  is 
well  arched. 

3.  Leap  to  right  (left)  knee-hang.     Fig.  6. 

Right  leg  is  thrown  over  right  arm,  knee  bent;  left  leg  is 
extended  forward  horizontally. 


RINGS. 


Fig.  6. 


4.  Leap  to  right  (left)  knee-hang  and  swing  extended  leg  forward 

and  back. 

5.  Leap  to  extended-leg-balance.     Fig.  7. 

6.  Leap  to  bent-knee-hang-leg-balance.     Fig.  8. 


294  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  7. 


RINGS. 


295 


Fig.  8. 


296 


MANUAL   OP  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

Fourth  Series. 


From  the  extended-leg-balance,  6,  execute: 

1 .  Change  to  in  verted -hang ;  to  nest-hang ;  to  knee-hang ;  to  hammock- 

hang,  etc. 

2.  Leap  to  rest  on  hands  and  dismount.     Fig,  9. 


Fig.  9. 

3.  Various  leg  exercises  in  the  rest. 

4.  Swing  legs  forward  and  backward  in  the  rest. 

5.  Swing  legs  in  the  bent-arm- rest  and  turn  over  backward  to  the 

stand . 

6.  From  extended-arm-rest  bend  to  the  bent-arm-rest  and  return 

to  extended-arm-rest. 


RINGS.  297 

Exercises  on  Rings  at  Height  of  Reach. 

Fifth  Series. 

The  rings  should  be  adjusted  so  as  to  admit  of  a  spring  from  the 
floor. 

1.  Leap  to  bent  or  extended-leg-balance-hang. 

2.  Leap  and  turn  over  backward  to  back-hang,  and  drop  from  there. 

3.  Same,  and  return  to  stand. 

4.  Leap   to  balance-hang,    1,    and   extend   to  inverted-hang,    legs 

between  ropes. 

5.  Leap  as  in  4;  return  to  balance-hang;  then  to  back-hang,  and 

drop- to  stand. 

6.  Leap  to  nest-hang. 

7.  Leap  to  bent-arm-hang.     Fig.  10. 

Sixth  Series. 

1.  From  7  swing  legs  backward  and  forward. 

2.  Same,  bending  knees  in  forward  and  raising  heels  in  backward 

swing. 

3.  Swing  legs  to  leg  balance. 

4.  Swing  legs  to  nest-hangs. 

5.  Swing  legs  to  knee-hangs. 

6.  Swing  legs  to  inverted-hang. 

7.  Swing  legs  and  turn-over  backward  to  back-hang,  and  drop. 


298 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig. 10. 


RINGS. 

Exercises  on  Rings  at  Jumping  Height. 


299 


1.  Leap  to  extended-arm-hang  and  execute  various  leg  exercises. 
Fig.  11. 


Fig.  11. 

2.  Swing  legs  forward  and  backward,  waist  high;  drop  to  the  stand 

at  end  of  rear  swing. 

3.  Same,  swinging  legs  to  height  of  shoulders,  head,  or  over  head. 

4.  Swing  legs  forward  and  backward,  and  turn-over  backward  to 

back-hang,  and  drop  to  the  stand. 

5.  Same,  returning  from  back-hang  to  front-hang. 


300  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

6.  Swing  legs  forward  and  backward,  keeping  trunk  in  upright  posi- 

tion as  much  as  possible. 

7.  Circle-swing  legs  right  or  left. 

The  legs  are  swung  around  in  a  circle  without  twisting  the 
arms  or  body. 

Eighth  Series. 

1.  Swing  legs  forward  and  backward  and  slightly  bend  arms  at  end 

of  each  swing. 

2.  Same,  jerking  rings  at  end  of  every  swing. 

3.  Same,  drawing  body  to  bent-arm-hang  at  end  of  every  forward 

swing,  extending  immediately  so  as  not  to  break  the  swing. 

4.  Swing  legs  to  extended-leg-balance  and  change  to  in  verted -hang. 

5.  Same,  to  leg-balance  and  then  turning  over  to  back-hang,  and 

returning  to  original  position . 

6.  Swing  legs  to  nest-hang. 


GYMNASTIC  CONTESTS. 


These  exercises  are  those  in  which  the  benefits  are  lost  sight  of  in 
the  pleasure  their  attainment  provides,  which  in  the  case  of  these 
contests  is  the  vanquishing  of  an  opponent.  The  men  are  pitted 
against  each  other  in  pairs;  age,  height,  weight,  and  general  physi- 
cal aptitude  being  the  determining  factors  in  the  selection. 

In  the  contests  in  which  superiority  is  dependent  upon  skill  and 
agility  no  restrictions  need  be  placed  upon  the  efforts  of  the  con- 
testants; but  in  those  that  are  a  test  of  strength  and  endurance  it 
is  well  to  call  a  contest  a  ' '  draw "',  when  the  men  are  equally  matched 
and  the  contest  is  likely  to  be  drawn  out  to  the  point  of  exhaustion 
of  one  or  both  contestants. 

It  is  recommended  that  these  contests  be  indulged  in  once  or  twice 
a  month  and  then  at  the  conclusion  of  the  regular  drill. 

Contests  that  require  skill  and  agility  should  alternate  with  those 
that  depend  upon  strength  and  endurance.  In  order  to  facilitate  the 
instruction  a  number  of  pairs  should  be  engaged  at  the  same  time. 

1.  Cane  ^^Testling:  The  cane  to  be  about  an  inch  in  diameter  and 
a  yard  long,  ends  rounded.  It  is  grasped  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
end,  knuckles  down,  and  with  the  left  hand,  knuckles  up,  inside 
of  and  close  to  the  opponent's  right  hand.  Endeavor  is  then  made 
to  wrest  the  cane  from  the  opponent.  Loss  of  grip  with  either  hand 
loses  the  bout.     Fig.  1. 

2.  Cane  twisting:  Same  cane  as  in  1.  Contestants  grasp  it  as  in 
1,  only  the  knuckles  of  both  hands  are  up,  and  the  arms  are  extended 
overhead.  Object:  The  contestants  endeavor  to  make  the  cane 
revolve  in  their  opponent's  hands  without  allowing  it  to  do  so  in  their 
own.     The  cane  must  be  forced  down. 

301 


302  MANTJAI  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

3.  Cane  pulling:  Contestants  sit  on  the  ground,  facing  each  other, 
legs  straight  and  the  soles  of  the  feet  in  contact.  The  cane  is  grasped 
as  in  2  but  close  to  the  feet.  Object:  To  pull  the  opponent  to  his 
feet.     The  legs  throughout  the  contest  must  be  kept  rigid.     Fig.  2. 

4.  "Bucked"  contest:  Contestants  sit  on  the  ground  "bucked"; 
i.  e.,  the  cane  is  passed  under  the  knees,  which  are  drawn  up,  and 
the  arms  passed  under  the  cane  with  the  fingers  laced  in  front  of  the 
ankles.  Object:  To  get  the  toes  under  those  of  the  opponent  and 
roll  him  over.     Fig.  3. 

5.  Single  pole  pushing:  Contestants  grasp  end  of  pole,  6  feet  long 
and  2  inches  thick,  and  brace  themselves.  Object:  To  push  the 
opponent  out  of  position.     Fig.  4. 

6.  Double  pole  pushing:  The  poles  are  placed  under  the  arms  close 
to  the  arm  pits,  ends  projecting.     Object:  Same  as  in  5.     Fig.  5. 

7.  Double  pole  pulling:  Position  as  in  6  but  standing  back  to  back. 
Object:  To  pull  the  opponent  out  of  position.     Fig.  6. 

8.  "Cock  fight: "  Contestants  hop  on  one  leg  with  the  arms  folded 
closely  over  the  chest.  Object:  By  butting  with  the  fleshy  part  of 
the  shoulder  without  raising  the  arms,  or  by  dodging  to  make  the 
opponent  change  his  feet  or  touch  the  floor  with  his  hand  or  other 
part  of  his  body. 

9.  One-legged  tug  of  war:  Contestants  hop  on  one  leg  and  grasp 
hands  firmly.  Object:  To  pull  the  opponent  forward  or  make  him 
place  the  raised  foot  on  the  floor. 

10.  The  "siege:"  One  contestant  stands  with  one  foot  in  a  circle 
14  inches  in  diameter,  the  other  foot  outside,  and  the  arms  folded 
as  in  8.  Two  other  contestants,  each  hopping  on  one  leg,  endeavor 
to  dislodge  the  one  in  the  circle  by  butting  him  with  the  shoulder. 
The  besieged  one  is  defeated  in  case  he  raises  the  foot  in  the  circle, 
or  removes  it  entirely  from  the  circle.  The  besiegers  are  defeated 
in  case  they  change  feet  or  touch  the  floor  as  in  8.  As  soon  as  either 
of  the  latter  is  defeated  his  place  is  immediately  filled,  so  that  there 


GYMNASTIC   CONTESTS. 


303 


FiG.l. 


Fig.  2. 


304 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


Fig.  4. 


GYMNASTIC  CONTESTS. 


805 


Fig.  5. 


31853°— 14 20 


Fig.  6. 


306  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

are  always  two  attaddng.     The  besieged  should  resort  to  volting, 
ducking,  etc.,  rather  than  to  depend  upon  his  strength. 

11.  One-armed  tug:  Contestants  stand  facing  each  other;  right 
hands  grasped,  feet  apart.  Object:  Without  moving  feet,  to  pull 
the  opponent  forward.     Shifting  the  feet  loses  the  bout.     Fig.  7. 

12 .  "  Tug  royal : "  Three  contestants  stand  facing  inward  and  grasp 
each  others  wrists  securely  and  with  their  feet  outside  a  circle  about 
three  feet  in  diameter.  Object:  By  pulling  or  pushing  to  make  one 
of  the  contestants  step  inside  of  the  circle. 

13.  Indian  wrestling:  Contestants  lie  upon  the  ground  face  up, 
right  shoulders  in  close  contact,  right  elbows  locked;  at  one  the 
right  leg  is  raised  overhead  and  lowered,  this  is  repeated  at  two,  and 
at  three  the  leg  is  raised  quickly  and  locked  with  the  opponent's 
right  leg.     Object :  To  roll  him  over  by  forcing  his  leg  down.     Fig.  8. 

14.  Medicine  ball  race:  Teams  of  five  or  six  men  are  organized  and 
a  track  for  each  team  is  marked  out.  This  track  consists  of  marks 
on  the  floor  or  ground  at  distances  of  4  yards.  On  each  of  these 
marks  stands  a  man  with  legs  apart,  the  team  forming  a  column 
of  files.  At  ready,  get  set,  the  contestants  prepare  for  the  race, 
and  at  go  the  first  man  in  the  column  rolls  a  medicine  ball,  which 
he  has  on  the  floor  in  front  of  him,  through  his  legs  to  No.  2,  he  in 
turn  rolls  it  to  3,  etc.,  when  it  reaches  the  last  man  he  picks  it  up 
and  runs  to  the  starting  place  with  it  and,  the  others  all  having 
shifted  back  one  mark,  the  rolling  is  repeated.  This  continues  until 
the  flrst  man  brings  the  ball  back  to  the  starting  place  and  every  man 
is  in  his  original  position.  The  ball  should  be  kept  rolling;  each 
man,  as  it  comes  ot  him,  pushing  it  on  quickly.  Any  ball  about 
9  inches  in  diameter  will  answer;  it  may  be  made  of  strong  cloth 
and  stuffed  with  cotton  waste. 


GYMNASTIC  CONTESTS. 


307 


Fig. 7. 


Fig.  8. 


ATHLETICS. 


The  value  of  athletic  training  in  the  service  is  dependent  upom 
the  effect  it  has  upon  the  mass,  and  not  upon  the  effect  it  has  upon 
the  individual  few.  The  training,  in  order  to  meet  the  requirements 
of  the  service,  should  have  nothing  in  common  with  competitive 
athletics,  but  should  be  broad  enough  in  the  method  of  its  applica- 
tion to  reach  out  and  include  the  development  of  every  man  to  the 
extent  of  his  capabilities  in  those  branches  of  athletics  the  utility  of 
which  to  the  service  is  unquestioned.  In  other  words,  it  should 
have  an  applicable  value,  be  educational,  and  not  spectacular,  for 
it  is  the  ability  of  the  average  of  the  mass  that  determines  the  effi- 
ciency of  a  fighting  machine.  ■  Consequently  it  should  be  the  aim 
of  instructors  to  place  this  phase  of  the  training  of  the  men  upon 
precisely  the  same  plane  as  that  of  other  portions  of  the  soldier's 
education. 

To  attain  this,  it  is  necessary  to  eliminate  those  athletic  events 
that  have  nothing  to  commend  them  from  a  military  point  of  view, 
such  as  short-distance  runs,  pole  vaulting,  and  hammer  throwing. 
These  events  should  be  confined  to  the  more  skillful,  for  whose 
benefit  an  annual  field  day  competition  should  be  arranged.  To 
the  service  the  long  distance,  the  half  mile,  mile,  two  and  five  mile 
runs,  and  the  jumps  are  much  more  essential  than  the  dashes,  pole 
vaulting,  etc. 

This  training  should  be  conducted  entirely  out  of  doors,  and  in 
mapping  out  programs  for  the  outdoor  period  instructors  should 
alternate  this  work  with  the  setting-up  exercises,  gymnastic  con- 
tests and  gymnactic  games. 

309 


310  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

In  order  to  stimulate  interest,  the  men  should  be  grouped  into 
classes  upon  the  basis  of  ability-  and  promoted  or  demoted  as  their 
progress,  or  lack  of  it,  warrants. 

Instructors  are  cautioned  to  go  about  this  training  cautiously  and 
train  the  men  carefully;  by  doing  so  they  will  not  fail  to  obtain  good 
results  and  avoid  those  injuries  that  are  directly  chargeable  to  over- 
indulgence and  over-exertion.  In  the  following  progressive  method 
squads  of  from  10  to  12  men  may  be  trained  at  the  same  time,  each 
squad  under  the  super^^.sion  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  trained 
enUsted  man,  and  all  under  the  direction  of  the  athletic  officer. 

A  distinction  is  made  between  double  timing,  running,  and  the 
flexion  run. 

Double  timing  has  for  its  purpose  the  quick  advancement  of  troops 
in  the  shortest  space  of  time  with  the  least  expenditure  of  physical 
effort,  commensurate  with  military  traditions  which  still  demand 
that  the  carriage  of  the  body  should  assoime  a  certain  uniform  attitude 
during  this  method  of  progression.  In  double  timing  the  saA-ing  in 
physical  effort  is  made  by  diminishing  the  leg  motions,  thereby 
reducing  the  height  of  the  flight  of  the  body  between  the  strides 
when  neither  foot  is  upon  the  ground  and  by  curtailing  the  height 
the  foot  is  raised. 

Running  is  the  most  expensive,  as  well  as  the  swiftest,  method  of 
progression  the  body  is  capable  of,  and  differs  from  the  double  timing 
by  the  increased  number  and  exaggerated  character  of  the  leg 
motions;  by  the  increased  force  with  which  the  body  is  thrust  for- 
ward and  upward  by  these  motions,  and  by  the  increased  demand 
upon  the  muscles  of  the  trunk  and  neck,  which  are  contracted  in 
order  to  give  the  trunk  and  head  that  immobility  without  which  speed 
is  impossible.  It  is  chiefly  because  of  this  immobility,  which  inter- 
feres seriously  with  respiration  and  which  in  turn  affects  the  heart 
action,  that  running  is  so  exhaustive.  Thus,  while  running  wiU 
develop  lung,  heart,  and  leg  power,  and  endurance  as  no  other  form 
of  exercise  will,  it  does  it  with  the  ever-present  liability  to  mjury 


ATHLETICS.  311 

when  carried  to  excess.  Instructors  are  therefore  cautioned  to 
exercise  the  utmost  care  in  its  application,  especially  when  handling 
untrained  men. 

Flexion  ran. — In  tliis  method  of  progression  physical  exertion  is 
reduced  to  a  minimum.  The  number  of  strides  per  minute  is  the 
same  as  in  double  timing,  but  a  considerable  latitude  in  the  carriage 
of  the  body  is  permitted.  As  its  name  implies,  the  muscles  of  the 
entire  body  are  flexed,  relaxed  as  much  as  possible, and  every  move- 
ment is  shorn  of  every  unnecessary  exaggeration.  The  trunk  rests 
loosely  upon  the  hips  and  is  allowed  to  fall  forward  until  the  center 
of  gra\dty  falls  on  a  point  about  the  length  of  a  stride  in  front  of  the 
body;  the  muscles  of  the  shoulders,  chest,  and  back  are  relaxed  and 
the  arms,  flexed  at  the  elbows,  hang  loosely  by  the  sides;  the  knees 
are  slightly  flexed  constantly  and  should  never  be  fully  extended; 
the  feet  are  raised  only  high  enough  to  clear  the  ground  and  are  al- 
lowed to  swing  foi-ward  with  the  soles  as  nearly  parallel  to  the  ground 
as  possible;  in  striking  the  ground  the  heels  come  in  contact  with  it 
first,  the  toes,  however,  being  raised  only  just  high  enough  to  keep 
them  from  becoming  chafed  by  rubbing  against  the  front  of  the  shoes. 

When  properly  assumed,  the  attitude  of  the  body  is  such  that  the 
weight  is  constantly  falling  forward  and  the  legs  are  moved  forward 
in  the  effort  to  establish  an  ever  changing  equilibrum.  This  means 
of  progression  has  been  variously  designated  as  the  "dog  trot," 
'•'running  walk,  "  and  "fox  gait,  "  and  is  similar  to  the  gait  used  by 
Indian  runners  and  the  jinrickisha  men. 

The  advantages  of  this  gait  over  all  others  lies  in  the  fact  that  it 
produces  the  maximum  results  through  the  minimum  of  exertion; 
that  the  strain  on  the  vital  organs  is  reduced  so  that  it  is  a  little  more 
than  that  caused  by  marching  in  quick  time;  and  that,  finally,  it 
is  dependent  upon  a  greatly  reduced  muscular  effort  and  not  upon 
excessive  respiratory,  circulatory,  or  neural  effort.  When  it  be- 
comes necessary  to  move  troops  rapidly  it  is  almost  imperative  that 
they  should  reach  their  designation  in  such  physical  condition  that 


312  MANTJAL   OF  PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 

they  may  be  engaged  actively  with  some  assurance  of  succesa; 
therefore  the  value  of  this  method  to  the  sen-ice  can  hardly  be 
overestimated. 

In  the  following  schedule  the  rate  of  the  walk  at  increased  gait  is 
140;  that  of  the  double  timing  and  the  flexion  runs.  ISO;  and  tliat  of 
the  running.  220  steps  per  minute. 

In  the  following  schedule  the  men  should  be  advanced  only  when 
they  can  cover  the  preceding  distance  >vithout  becoming  exhausted 
or  fatigued. 

SCHEDULE. 

1.  3^  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  }4  mile  flexion  run,  ^  mile  walk. 

2.  }4  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  3>4  mile  flexion  run,  }^  mile  walk. 

3.  }i  mile  walk  at  increased  gait.  ^  s  mile  flexion  run.  i^  mile  walk. 

4.  }i  mile  walk  at  increased  gait.  3-2  °^1p  flexion  run,  }i  mile  walk. 

5.  li  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  5  g  mile  flexion  run,  }g  mile  walk. 

6.  }/8  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  ^^  mile  flexion  run,  J^  mile  walk. 

7.  }i  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  Ji  mile  flexion  run,  }i  mile  walk. 

8.  }/8  mile  walk  at  increased  gait,  1  ndle  flexion  run,  3^^  mile  walk. 

9.  3  s  mile  double  timing,  }4  mile  flexion  run.  3^  mile  walk. 

10.  }i  mile  double  timing.  3^  mile  flexion  run,  3s  mile  walk. 

11.  34  mile  double  timing.  ?  §  mile  flexion  run,  }i  mile  walk. 

12.  3i  mile  double  timing.  3|  mile  flexion  run,  }/s  mile  walk. 

13.  3s  mile  running,  jo  mile  flexion  run,  3^  mile  walk. 

14.  }i  mile  running,  }4  mile  flexion  run,  3^  mile  walk. 

15.  }i  mile  running.  ^.3  mUe  flexion  run,  3^8  mile  walk. 

16.  34  mile  running,  3^  mile  flexion  run,  3^  mile  walk. 

17.  34  mile  running,  >§  mile  flexion  run,  }^  mile  walk. 
IS.  3-4  mile  running,  1  mile  flexion  run,  3^  mUe  walk. 

19.  34  mile  running.  13^  miles  flexion  run,  3-^  mile  walk. 

20.  34  mile  running,  134  miles  flexion  run,  3  s  mile  walk. 

21.  3-4  mile  mnning.  l-^^'  miles  flexion  run,  jg  mile  walk. 

22.  3i  mile  running.  1^  o  miles  flexion  run,  3'8  mile  walk. 


ATHLETICS.  313 

23.  3^  mile  running,  1^^  miles  flexion  run,  3^  mile  walk. 

24.  2  miles  flexion  run,  }/g  mile  walk. 

25.  2  miles  double  timing,  3^  mile  walk. 

26.  1  mile  running,  1  mile  flexion  run,  ^  mile  walk. 

WTien  the  men  become  seasoned  the  above  exercises  should  be 
practiced  with  light  equipment,  rifle,  cartridge  belt,  and  ammunition. 
The  course  may  also  be  laid  across  country.  A  practical  test  approxi- 
mating service  conditions  consists  in  having  an  entire  organization 
cover  the  2-mile  course  across  country,  equipped  with  rifle,  belt, 
etc.,  the  finish  being  the  target  range,  where  the  men  should  imme- 
diately be  engaged  in  a  skirmish  run. 


The  following  jumps  should  be  first  practiced  to  teach  the  men 
proper  form,  and  when  they  have  acquired  this  the  jump  should  be 
for  distance  and  height,  or  for  a  combination  of  the  two. 

1.  Standing  broad. 

2.  Standing  high. 

3.  Standing  broad-high. 

4.  Running  broad. 

5.  Running  high. 

6.  Running  broad-high. 

7.  Standing  three  jumps. 

8.  Standing  hop,  step,  and  jump. 

9.  Running  hop,  step,  and  jump. 

Whenever  it  is  possible  the  obstacles  to  be  cleared  should  be 
natural  ones,  such  as  would  confront  men  in  the  field. 


r 


SWIMMING- 


1.  Arrangements  for  the  instruction  in  swimming  must  be  deter- 
mined by  the  facilities  existing  at  the  various  posts  or  stations. 

At  such  of  the  latter  where  there  is  sufficient  depth  of  water  and 
available  docks,  swimming  platforms  can  be  readily  erected.  These 
platforms,  which  may  be  built  in  sections  so  that  they  can  be  re- 
moved after  the  swimming  season,  should  project  not  less  than  4  feet 
beyond  the  edge  of  the  dock,  and  the  distance  from  the  platform 
floor  to  the  surface  of  the  water  should  not  be  less  than  30  inches. 
The  length  of  the  platform  will  depend  upon  the  available  space 
and  the  number  of  men  to  be  instructed.  A  space  of  4  by  12  feet 
should  be  allowed  for  each  man. 

Uprights  of  4  by  4  stuff,  projecting  8  feet  above  the  platform  and 
carrying  a  crosspiece  sufficiently  long  to  project  at  least  a  foot 
beyond  the  outer  edge  of  the  platform,  should  be  erected  at  intervals 
of  12  feet.  These  uprights,  with  their  crosspieces,  provide  the 
support  for  the  swimmer  and  they  must,  therefore,  be  securely 
bolted  to  the  face  of  the  dock  and  to  the  sleepers  of  the  platform,  and 
the  crosspiece,  which  has  a  swivel  pulley  large  enough  to  take  the 
swimming  rope  attached  to  the  outer  end,  must  be  braced  against 
the  upright.  Ladders  leading  to  the  platform  from  the  water  should 
be  placed  where  they  will  not  be  in  the  way. 

2.  WTiere  it  is  impracticable  to  build  the  platform  described  above, 
the  uprights  alone  will  answer  the  purpose  of  instructing  the  men 
in  the  stroke,  swimming  poles  being  used  when  the  soldier  is  able 
to  propel  himself. 

3.  The  simplest  device,  in  connection  with  giving  this  instruction 
from  the  dock,  consists  in  erecting  an  upright  about  42  inches  high 

315 


316  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

close  to  the  edge  of  the  dock,  and  use  it  as  a  fulcrum  for  the  swimming 
pole,  the  soldier  being  suspended  from  a  rope  attached  to  the  end 
of  the  pole. 

4.  \\lien  no  docks  are  available,  platforms  along  the  lines  described 
under  1  may  be  erected  in  the  -water  on  piles  or.  when  this  is  imprac- 
ticable, floats  with  raised  platforms  and  uprights  may  be  substituted. 

8.  In  the  absence  of  any  facilities,  but  where  the  character  of  the 
water  and  the  bottom  is  such  as  to  make  it  possible,  the  men  must 
be  instructed  to  assist  one  another.  This  is  done  by  standing  in 
water  of  sufficient  depth  and  holding  the  one  to  be  instructed  in  the 
proper  position  by  placing  the  left  hand  under  his  chin  and  the 
right  hand  between  his  shoulder  blades  and  assuming  a  position  that 
will  not  interfere  with  the  swimmer's  movements. 

BELTS. 

6.  These  are  3  inches  wide,  made  of  canvas,  padded  on  the  inside 
with  hair  and  bound  and  faced  with  some  soft  material  that  will 
not  irritate  the  skin.  The  length  should  be  great  enough  to  bring 
the  ends  of  the  belt  to  within  4  inches  of  meeting  in  the  back. 

On  the  outside  of  the  belt  three  |-inch  iron  rings  are  securely 
sewed  to  it  at  regular  inters'als,  while  at  each  end  of  the  belt  there 
is  a  larger  ring  1  inch  in  diameter. 

ROPES. 

7.  A  half  inch  cotton  rope  should  be  used;  for  beginners  15  feet 
will  be  found  ample,  while  30  feet  should  be  used  for  those  pre- 
paring to  qualify. 

EOPES  AND  BELTS. 

8.  The  rope  should  be  fastened  in  the  following  manner:  Tie 
the  end  of  the  rope  securely  to  the  small  ring,  1,  nearest  the  larger 
one.  A;  pass  it  through  the  other  two  small  rings,  2  and  3.  and  through 
the  two  larger  ones,  B  and  A;  then  through  B,  forward,  and  then 


SWIMMING. 


317 


halfway  between  A  and  B,  where  it  is  looped  and  passed  under. 
Plate  A. 

The  advantage  of  this  arrangement  is  its  safety,  the  rope  can  not 
become  untied;  it  is  readily  adjusted;  all  that  is  necessary^  is  to 
loosen  the  loop  and  pull  the  ends  of  the  belt  apart;  once  it  is  adjusted 
to  the  swimmer  it  remains  fixed,  there  is  no  tightening  due  to  slipping 
on  account  of  the  weight  thrown  upon  it. 


Plate  A. 


POLES. 


9.  These  should  be  of  some  tough,  but  light,  material,  2  inches 
in  diameter  and  from  8  to  10  feet  long.  At  one  end  a  swivel  pulley 
is  attached  through  which  the  swimming  rope  is  run. 

In  the  absence  ot  projecting  swimming  platforms,  beginners  are 
suspended  from  the  end  of  these  poles  resting  on  the  upright  fulcrum 
described  under  3,  until  they  have  acquired  the  stroke.  WTien  they 
begin  to  make  progress  and  are  propelling  themselves,  the  instructor 
carries  the  pole  in  his  hands  with  the  end  projecting  far  enough  over 
the  edge  of  the  dock  to  give  the  swimmer  sufficient  space  to  move 
in  without  coming  in  contact  with  the  dock. 


318  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

INSTRUCTION. 

The  Breast  Stroke. 

10.  This  stroke  lia\'ing  for  many  years  been  found  the  best  adapted 
for  niilitarA-  purposes,  has  been  adopted  by  all  armies  in  -^hich  the 
instruction  in  swimming  is  made  compulson.'. 

It  is  the  basis  upon  -which  all  other  methods  of  progression  in  the 
water  are  founded,  and  those  who  acquire  proficiency  in  its  use 
develop  coordination  to  snch  a  degree  that  they  have  no  difficulty 
whatever  in  acquiring  any  other  stroke,  no  matter  how  complicated. 

The  character  of  the  movements  comprising  this  stroke  brings  into 
play  such  a  great  variety  of  muscle  groups,  all  in  accordance  with 
their  natural  functions  and  with  such  an  equal  distribution  of  effort, 
that  aside  from  its  usefulness  tliis  stroke  has  an  incomparable  value 
as  an  agent  for  all-around  development. 

Land  Ixstruction. 

11.  The  efficacy  of  this  instruction  is  a  mooted  question:  and 
experience  has  demonstrated  that  aside  from  giving  the  beginner  a 
conception  of  what  is  required  of  him  when  he  enters  the  water  it 
is  of  little  value;  in  other  words,  swimming  instruction  in  order  to 
be  successful  must  be  imparted  to  the  beginner  while  he  is  in  the 
water. 

Various  methods  are  used  for  swimming  instruction  on  land,  and 
some  of  them  are  noted  here  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  desire  to 
make  use  of  them. 

The  appUance  most  commonly  used  is  the  so-called  ''swimming 
buck,' '  a  camp  stool  slightly  wider  and  higher  than  the  ordinary-  one, 
upon  which  the  beginner  assumes  a  position  in  everj'  way  similar 
to  that  assumed  in  the  water.  The  instruction  proceeds  in  indenti- 
callv  the  same  wav  as  that  described  in  the  water  instruction. 


SWIMMING.  319 

Another  method  is  to  lie  on  the  back  in  a  position  that  approxi- 
mates as  closely  as  possible  to  the  first  position  in  the  water  instruc- 
tion and  execute  the  movements  in  that  position. 

Still  another  method  is  to  stand  on  one  leg,  supporting  the  body 
with  the  hand  on  the  same  side,  and  with  the  body  bent  forward 
horizontally  and  the  other  arm  and  leg  extended  to  the  front  and 
rear,  respectively,  execute  the  movements  with  one  side  several 
times  and  then  repeat  it  with  the  other. 

Water  Instruction. 

12.  The  belt  having  been  adjusted,  which  is  done  by  slipping  it 
over  the  head  of  the  soldier  and  securing  it  well  up  under  his  arms, 
being  careful  not  to  have  it  so  tight  that  it  will  bind  his  movements 
or  restrict  his  respiration,  and  being  careful  also  that  the  loop  of  the 
rope  is  squarely  between  the  shoulder  blades,  he  is  prepared  to  leap 
into  the  water.  This  should  always  be  insisted  upon,  since,  while  it 
appears  drastic,  it  is  most  efficacious  in  overcoming  the  fear  of  the 
water  so  common  amongst  adults  who  have  not  learned  how  to  swim. 

The  soldier  having  been  cautioned  not  to  gasp  or  open  his  mouth 
when  he  strikes  the  water  and  not  to  throw  his  arms  about  wildly, 
but  to  open  his  eyes  and  to  keep  cool,  leaps  from  the  platform  at  the 
command /ump,  which  is  executed  with  the  feet  striking  the  water 
first,  legs  together  and  extended,  trunk  erect,  and  arms  at  the  sides. 

After  reaching  the  surface,  in  which  he  is  assisted  by  the  instruc- 
tor, he  will  assume  the  following  position: 

The  body,  chest  down,  is  fully  extended  horizontally;  the  head 
is  bent  back;  the  arms,  with  fingers  extended  and  closed  and  thumbs 
together  and  palms  down,  are  stretched  to  the  front,  hands  just  under 
the  surface;  the  legs,  with  knees  straight,  are  closed  and  extended 
horizontally  to  the  rear;  the  heels  are  together  and  the  feet  are  turned 
out  at  an  angle  of  about  60°  and  the  toes  are  turned  up  perpendicular 
to  the  surface.     Fig.  1. 


MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


In  assuming  this  position  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  any  tend-^ 
ency  toward  rigidity;  the  muscles  are  stretched,  not  contracted. 

In  this  position  the  instructor  commands: 
1.  Arm  Stroke,  2.  ONE,  3.  TWO,  4.  THREE. 

At  one,  the  arms  fully  stretched,  palms  down,  are  moved 
sideward  horizontally,  in  a  circular  motion  of  greatest  possible 
radius  until  they  are  in  a  line  with  the  shoulders. 

At  two,  the  elbows  are  flexed  until  the  upper  arms  touch 
and  are  parallel  to  the  chest,  the  forearms,  palms  still  turned 
down,  continue  the  motion  until  the  thumbs  are  brought 
together  directly  under  the  chin. 

At  three,  the  arms  are  stretched  forward  to  the  original 
position,  Fig.  1. 


Fig.  1. 

In  the  beginning  a  pause  should  be  made  in  every  position  to 
insure  accuracy;  when  that  has  been  attained  the  arm  stroke  is  exe- 
cuted in  one  continuous  movement  in  the  following  manner: 

At  o-n-e,  drawn  out  to  indicate  the  character  of  the  movement, 
which  is  comparatively  slow,  the  arms  are  brought  in  line  with  the 
shoulders,  as  described  before;  the  moment  that  movement  is  about 
to  be  completed  the  command  and — tico  is  given,  briskly  followed 
by  the  command  three.  At  and — two,  the  arms  are  drawn-  to  the 
body  and  extended  forward,  in  a  continuous  movement;  and  at 
three,  the  arms  pause  in  the  first  position. 

The  cadence  indicated  here  is  the  regular  swimming  cadence,  the 
first  count  "requiring  as  much  time  as  the  others  combined. 

The  legs  may  be  relaxed  while  the  arms  are  being  exercised. 


SWIMMING.  321 

Proper  breathing  is  always  a  source  of  considerable  annoyance  to 
:)eginners,  and  instructors  can  not  begin  too  early  to  teach  how  and 
.vhen  to  inhale  and  to  exliale.  This  should  be  done  when  the  arm 
stroke  is  taught  and  insisted  upon  throughout  the  instruction  until 
-espiration  is  carried  on  naturally.  The  inhalation  occurs  while  the 
irms  are  being  moved  outward  and  sideward,  and  the  exlialation 
follows  immediately  after  their  extension.  In  quiet  water  this 
breathing  may  be  carried  on  through  the  nostrils,  but  in  rough  water 
or  where  there  is  a  tendency  to  choke  because  of  water  entering  the 
nostrils,  mouth  breathing  must  be  resorted  to. 

WTien  the  arm  movements  are  understood  and  accurately  per- 
formed the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Leg  Stroke,  2.  ONE,  3.  TWO,  4.  THREE. 

The  arms  are  held  in  the  forward  position  without  constraint. 
At  one,  the  legs  and  thighs  are  flexed  on  the  body  by  draw- 
ing the  knees  under  it  until  the  thighs  are  slightly  beyond 
the  perpendicular  and  the  legs  horizontal;  the  heels  remain 
together,  the  toes  turned  out  and  up,  but  the  knees  are  sepa- 
rated, being  in  line  with  the  feet. 

At  two,  the  legs  are  quickly  and  fully  extended  in  as  wide 
a  straddle  as  possible  with  an  outward  and  backward  motion, 
the  soles  of  the  feet  being  forced  against  the  w  ater. 

At  three,  the  legs,  remaining  fully  extended,  are  brought 
together  briskly  to  the  first  position. 
As  in  the  arm  stroke,  a  pause  should  be  made  in  each  position  to 
insure  accuracy,   and  when  that  has  been  accomplished  the  leg 
movements  should  be  blended  into  one  continuous  motion  as  follows: 
At  one,  the  legs  remain  in  the  first  position;  and  at  and,  they 
are  drawn  up  as  described  above,  the  movement  being  exe- 
cuted quietly  and  without  force  in  order  to  avoid  offering  too 
much  resistance  to  the  water;  just  as  the  legs  reach  the  pre- 
scribed position  the  commands  tit'o  and  three  are  given  briskly 
and  in  quick  succession,  indicating  that  the  completion  oi  side- 
ward movement  is  followed  instantly  by  the  closing  of  the  legs. 
31853"— 14 21 


322 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


When  these  movementcs  are  tliorouglily  understood  and  correctly 
carried  out,  the  ann  and  leg  movements  are  combined  and  executed 
at  the  command: 

1.  Stroke,  2.  ONE,  3.  AXD— TWO,  4.  THREE. 

At  one.  the  arms  begin  the  sideward  mnvement.  the  legs 
remaining  in  the  first  position. 

At  and,  the  arms  are  drawn  in  to  the  b<>d\-  and  the  knees  are 
brought  up.     Fig.  2. 

At  two,  the  arms  are  extencj^d  forward  and  the  legs  sideward, 
Fig.  3;  and  at  three,  the  legs  are  closed,  while  the  arms  remain 
in  the  first  position.     Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 

Until  the  soldier  has  learned  to  coordinate  and  to  grasp  what  is 
required  of  him,  it  is  ad^'i.sable  to  pause  in  each  position;  when  he 
ha^  succeeded  in  doing  this  the  stroke  is  given  in  the  proper  swim- 
ming cadence,  the  arm  movements  beginning  at  one  and  ceasing  at 
tuo  and  pausing  at  three;  while  the  legs  remain  motionless  in  the 
first  position  at  one,  but  begin  at  a7j^and  cease  at  three:  a  considerable 
pause  should  be  made  between  strokes. 

It  is  ad^'isable  to  impress  upon  beginners  that  swimming  with  this 
stroke  is  not  dependent  upon  excessive  muscular  exertion  or  rigidity, 


SWIMMING. 


323 


but  that  all  extensions  of  the  arms  and  legs  are  reaches  rather  than 
thrusts,  and  that  the  body  must  be  relaxed  as  much  as  possible. 

Since  there  is  no  danger  of  the  body  sinking  while  it  is  moving, 
too  much  stress  can  hardly  be  laid  upon  the  importance  of  the  pause 
between  strokes,  which  in  the  case  of  even  ordinary  swimmers  should 
be  equal  to  the  length  of  time  it  takes  to  complete  the  stroke,  while 
in  powerful  swimmers  this  pause  is  from  three  to  four  times  the 
duration  of  each  stroke,  a  husbanding  of  muscular  energy  which 
makes  it  possible  to  swim  long  distances  without  becoming  exhausted. 

The  men  must  also  be  given  to  understand  that  the  legs  furnish  the 
entire  propelling  power  in  which  the  closing  of  the  legs  after  the 


Fig.  3. 


extension  is  equally  as  valuable  as  the  extension  itself.  The  arms, 
for  ordinary  purposes,  are  used  merely  for  the  purpose  of  buoying  up 
the  head,  not  for  the  purpose  of  propulsion,  and  for  that  reason  they 
are  held  and  moved  in  a  position  that  has  the  advaiitage  of  being  the 
most  natural,  the  least  fatiguing,  and  that  offers  the  least  resistance 
to  the  water.  Thus  the  entire  burden  of  the  effort  devolves  upon 
those  members  of  the  body  upon  which  this  burden  is  imposed  upon 
the  land,  the  legs,  and  not  upon  those  members  which  nature  never 
intended  for  such  a  purpose,  the  arms.  It  is  due  entirely  to  this 
natural  and  equable  employment  of  those  members  that  the  breast 
stroke  is  used,  without  exception  almost,  by  all  long-distance  swim- 


324  MANUAL  OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

mers  when  it  is  a  question  of  endurance  rather  than  of  speed.  For 
the  latter  purpose  the  hands  may  be  turned  with  the  palms  out  in 
the  first  motion,  but  this  should  be  restricted  to  those  who  have 
qualified  with  the  regular  stroke,  and  who  appreciate  the  value  of  the 
leg  stroke. 

^Mien  the  soldier  can  execute  the  movements  faultlessly  and  with- 
out the  numbers,  he  is  released  from  further  instruction  on  the  sta- 
tionary line  and  given  instruction  on  a  loose  line.  The  belt,  being 
adjusted  as  before,  is  attached  to  a  line  that  is  held  in  the  hands  of 
the  instructor.  The  man  now  begins  the  stroke  at  one  end  of  the 
platform  and  as  he  forces  himself  forward  the  instructor  advances 
with  him,  having  the  rope  taut  and  standing  while  the  pupil  is 
bringing  his  arms  around  and  his  knees  up  and  slightly  slackening 
the  rope  and  advancing  a  step  as  he  extends. 

In  a  short  time  he  will  begin  to  carry  his  own  weight,  and  when  he 
has  learned  to  swim  from  30  to  50  strokes  he  should  be  made  to  swim 
on  the  arch  of  a  circle  whose  radius  should  be  constantly  increased 
until  he  is  able  to  swim  several  minutes.  \\Tien  he  can  do  this  he 
should  be  timed  daily  until  he  is  able  to  swim  for  ten  minutes,  when 
he  should  be  excused  from  further  instruction,  but  encouraged  to 
continue  practice  daily  until  he  has  gained  confidence  in  himself 
and  learned  to  keep  himself  afloat  by  other  methods  besides  the 
breast  stroke. 

Common  Faults. 

13.  For  the  benefit  of  instructors,  the  faults  and  bad  habits  moat 
common  with  beginners  are  enumerated  here: 

The  tendency  to  arch  the  back  in  order  to  raise  the  head  higher 
above  the  water  than  necessary:  This  causes  the  body  to  be  held  in 
a  constraint  position  and  the  legs  to  sink,  thereby  presenting  a 
greater  resistive  surface  to  the  water,  causing  slow  and  deep  swim- 
ming. The  body  must  be  relaxed  and  if  necessary  the  chin  may 
rest  upon  the  surface  of  the  water;  this  will  cause  the  legs  to  rise. 


SWIMMING.  325 

Raising  the  hips  while  drawing  the  knees  up:  This  causes  the  head 
to  be  thrown  forward  into  the  water  and  detracts  from  the  power  of 
the  leg  motions. 

Not  flexing  the  thighs  sufficiently,  which  causes  the  feet  to  assume 
a  horizontal  instead  of  a  perpendicular  position,  thereby  not  only 
decreasing  the  sideward  reach  of  the  leg  stroke  but  also  the  power 
of  the  backward  push  with  the  soles  of  the  feet. 

Thrusting  the  arms  forward  below  the  horizontal,  +  hereby  lessen- 
ing the  buoyancy  of  the  head  which  is  dragged  downward  by  this 
movement. 

Failure  to  draw  the  upper  arms  in  close  to  the  cliin  and  the  hands 
under  the  cliin,  which  serA^es  to  decrease  the  buoyancy  of  the  upper 
trunk  and  head. 

Tlirusting  the  legs  downward  instead  of  straight  to  the  rear,  which 
causes  deep  swimming  and  impedes  progress. 

Spreading  the  fingers  and  failing  to  keep  the  thumb  close  to  the 
first  finger,  which  detracts  very  decidedly  from  the  buoyance  power 
of  the  arms  and  hands. 

Not  breathing  properly,  which  causes  mental  anxiety,  fatigue,  and 
respiratory  difficulties. 

Moving  the  arms  too  far  to  the  rear,  wliich  causes  the  head  to  be 
lowered. 

Disregarding  the  tempo  of  the  stroke  and  the  pause  between  the 
strokes,  which  always  results  in  loss  of  confidence  and  of  the  stroke. 

Side  Stroke. 

14.  Those  who  have  acquired  proficiency  in  the  breast  stroke,  will, 
as  has  been  stated  before,  have  no  difficulty  in  mastering  any  other 
method,  by  dint  of  a  little  practice  and  perseverance,  regular  instruc- 
tion being  unnecessary. 

The  side  stroke  is  readily  learned,  and  since  it  can  be  carried  out 
on  either  side  it  has  many  advantages  over  the  one-sided  methods. 


326 


MANTJAI   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


The  swimmer  lies  upon  liis  side,  preferably  the  right,  the  head, 
face  turned  upward,  resting  in  the  water;  the  body  and  legs  extended 
without  constraint  and  the  right  arm  stretched  straight  out  under  the 
head  in  prolongation  of  the  body;  the  left  arm  stretched  downward 
over  the  left  thigh  with  the  hand  just  in  rear  of  the  body;  palms  of 
both  hands  down.     Fig.  4. 


Fig.  4. 

From  this  position  the  left  forearm  is  brought  up  across  the  chest 
until  the  hand,  palm  down,  is  close  to  the  chin;  the  right  arm  in  the 
meanwhile  is  pressed  downward  about  45°,  when  the  elbow  is  bent 
and  drawn  back  under  the  chest  until  the  hand,  palm  down,  is  as 
close  as  possible  to  the  right  shoulder.     "UTiile  the  arms  are  executing 


Fig.  5. 

these  movements,  the  knees  are  drawn  up  precisely  as  they  are  in 
the  breast  stroke.  Fig.  5.  From  this  position  the  legs  are  extended 
and  closed  as  in  the  breast  stroke,  except  that  they  are  not  so  far 
apart,  and  the  arms  are  extended.  Fig.  6,  the  right  straight  out  under 
the  head  to  its  original  position  and  the  left  arm  forward  and  then 
backward  in  as  large  a  circular  sweep  as  possible  until  it,  too,  reaches 


SWIMMING. 


327 


its  original  position,  Fig.  4.  After  pausing,  the  length  of  the  pause 
depending  upon  the  carrying  quality  of  the  stroke,  the  movement  is 
repeated. 


Fig.  6. 


Fig.  7. 


Variety  may  be  given  this  stroke  by  the  introduction  of  the 
"scissors  kick,"  the  upper  leg  being  extended  straight  out  to  the 
front  and  the  under  leg  to  the  rear,  the  legs  being  brought  to  the  first 
position  from  there.     Figs.  7  and  8. 


328 


MANUAL   OF   PHYSICAL   TRAINING. 


Back  Stroke. 

1-3.  As  the  body  displaces  more  water  when  lying  on  the  back  than 
it  does  in  any  other  position,  thus  increasing  its  buoyancy,  swimming 
with  the  back  stroke  is  the  most  easily  acquired  of  any  stroke.  Its 
greatest  value  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  affords  an  exhausted  swimmer 
a  chance  to  rest. 

1.   With  legs. 

The  swimmer  extends  himself  in  the  water,  face  upward,  body  and 
leers  extended  without  constraint;  the  head  submerged  to  the  ears 


Fig. 


and  the  arms  lying  close  to  the  sides,  palms  down.  In  this  position 
he  executes  the  leg  movements  of  the  breast  stroke,  except  that  the 
knees  are  not  drawn  up  as  high  and  are  separated  more.  Care  should 
be  taken  not  to  move  the  hips  while  the  knees  are  being  drawn  up 
and  extended,  because  any  motion  of  the  hips  will  cause  the  head 
to  be  submerged. 

2.    With  legs  and  arms. 

The  position  is  the  same  as  above,     ^^^^en  the  knees  are  being 
drawn  up,  the  elbows  are  bent  and  raised  until  the  upper  arms  are  in 


SWIMMING.  329 

line  with  the  shoulders,  and  the  hands,  palms  down,  are  close  to  the 
chest;  as  the  knees  are  being  extended  and  the  legs  closed,  the  arms 
are  flung  out  sideward  and  brought  down  to  the  sides  in  a  whip-like 
movement,  the  palms  turned  in. 

3.    With  legs  and  overhead  arm  stroke. 

In  this  stroke  the  arms  are  raised  forward  and  overhead,  out  of 
the  water,  and  as  they  enter  the  water  beyond  the  head  they  are 
brought  to  the  sides  of  the  body  with  a  strong  horizontal  movement, 
arms  extended  and  palms  down.  The  knees  are  drawn  up  just 
as  the  arms  enter  the  water,  and  they  are  extended  and  closed  while 
the  arms  are  being  brought  to  the  sides. 

TREADING  WATER. 

16.  The  body  is  held  in  a  perpendicular  position  and  the  knees  are 
drawn  up  and  extended  downward  alternately  in  quick  succession, 
the  hands  assisting  by  pressing  the  water  downward. 

Treading  water  may  also  be  done  by  executing  the  leg  motions  of 
the  breast  stroke  in  a  modified  form  in  quick  succession.  These 
movements  should  be  practiced  until  the  swimmer  is  able  to  raise 
his  hands  out  of  water. 

FLOATING. 

17.  Floating  is  essential  because  it  affords  the  swimmer  the  most 
complete  rest  in  the  water,  thus  giving  him  an  opportunity  to  repair 
his  strength. 

In  fresh  water  this  means  of  sustaining  the  body  is  possible  only 
in  exceptional  cases  with  men;  in  salt  water,  however,  the  inability 
to  float  is  the  exception. 

The  swimmer  lies  in  the  water  horizontally,  face  up,  exerting  him- 
self just  enough  to  keep  his  body,  arms,  and  legs  fully  but  not  rigidly 
extended.  The  whole  body,  except  the  face  and  mouth,  should  be 
submerged.  The  legs  may  be  kept  closed  or  separated;  the  arms 
should  be  held  away  from  the  body,  hands  in  the  plane  of  the  waist 


330 


MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 


with  the  palms  down;  the  lungs  should  be  inflated  and  ])y  short 
exhalations  and  proportionately  longer  inhalation,  carried  on  through 
the  mouth,  they  should  be  kept  so  as  much  as  possible. 

"\Mien  difficulty  is  encountered  in  floating,  a  slight  sculling  move- 
ment of  the  hands,  from  the  ^vTist.  will  often  suflSce  to  keep  the  body 
afloat.  If  the  legs  should  sink,  they  may  be  held  flexed  at  the  knee.s 
until  they  are  at  right  angles  to  the  thighs;  or  the  body  may  be 
"dished"  slightly;  that  is,  bent  slightly  forward  at  the  waist. 


Fig.  9. 


DIVING. 

18.  This  may  be  divided  into  the  ordinar\^  dive,  in  which  the 
body  enters  the  water  at  an  angle  of  45° ;  the  perpendicular,  or  deep 
dive,  and  the  shallow  dive,  in  which  the  body  enters  the  water  at 
an  angle  of  about  30°.  Figs.  9.  10,  and  11. 

In  preparing  to  dive  the  swimmer  stands  with  his  toes  projecting 
beyond  the  edge  of  the  platform  and  his  arms  stretched  sideward. 
As  he  springs  off,  the  arms  are  swung  forward  overhead,  palms 
together;  the  head  is  thrown  forward  between  the  arms  and  the  legs 


SWIMMING. 


331 


are  swung  up  until  the  body  assumes  the  desired  angle.     Arms  and 
legs  must  be  extended  and  closed,  feet  depressed.     The  moment 


Fig. 10. 


Fig.  11. 


the  body  enters  the  water  the  eyes  are  opened,  the  arms  and  head 
pressed  back,  and  the  legs  relaxed;  this  will  cause  the  body  to  rise 
to  the  surface. 


332  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

SWIMMING  WITH  EQUIPMENT. 

19.  "\Mien  the  men  become  proficient  swimmers  they  should  be 
tauglit  to  swim  with  the  equipment. 

This  instruction  should  be  divided  as  follows: 

1.  Swimming  in  uniform;  if  blouses  are  worn  they  should  be 
unbuttoned. 

2.  Swimming  nude  with  pack. 

3.  Swimming  nude  with  pack  and  ammunition  belt. 

4.  Swimming  nude  with  pack,  belt,  and  rifle. 

The  pack  should  be  adjusted  to  the  body  snugly  to  reduce 
the  lateral  motion  as  much  as  possible;  the  canteen  should  be 
empty  and  the  rifle  sli^uld  be  inserted  into  the  middle  of  the 
pack,  barrel  down,  until  the  breech  mechanism  projects  over 
the  water. 

5.  Repeat  2,  3,  and  4,  clad  in  trousers. 

6.  Same,  clad  in  trousers  and  shirts. 

7.  Same,  in  complete  uniform. 

Except  when  the  urgency  of  the  emergency  does  not  permit  it,  the 
men  should  be  permitted  to  divest  themselves  of  their  shoes,  leggins 
and  blouses  and  attach  them  to  the  pack. 

Since  the  buoyance  and  water-tightness  of  the  packs  is  great 
enough  to  keep  them  afloat  from  15  to  20  minutes,  they  lend  them- 
selves admirably  to  the  formation  of  rafts,  when  fastened  together,  to 
which  those  who  can  not  swim  can  cling  while  being  drawn  over  a 
stream  by  a  rope,  one  end  of  which  has  been  carried  over  by 
a  swimmer. 

GENERAL  HINTS. 

1.  Swimming  should  not  be  indulged  in  immediately  before  or 
after  meals,  the  best  time  being  an  hour  before  or  from  two  to  three 
hours  after  meals. 

2.  The  water  should  not  be  entered  when  the  body  is  overheated 
or  wet  with  perspiration;  cramps  or  other  more  serious  discomforts  are 
likelv  to  result. 


SWIMMING.  333 

3.  The  body  should  be  dried  thoroughly  and  the  water  should  be 
entered  by  plunging  in  head  foremost,  if  practicable,  or  by  leaping. 

4.  Men  should  be  cautioned  not  to  stand  in  the  water  to  cool  off, 
as  doing  so  has  an  enervating  effect. 

5.  WTiile  in  the  water  the  body  should  be  kept  in  motion;  standing 
about  after  swimming  is  liable  to  cause  chills. 

6.  When  through  swimming  the  water  should  be  quitted  at  once 
and  the  body  dried  and  dressed  promptly. 

7.  During  instructions  only  those  that  are  employed  should  leave 
the  dressing  rooms;  when  it  is  necessary  to  have  more  men  than  can 
be  employed  on  the  platform,  those  not  employed  should  be  made 
to  wear  blouses  or  other  covering  for  the  body. 

8.  When  attacked  by  cramps  the  men  should  be  instructed  not  to 
lose  presence  of  mind,  but  to  kick  out  more  vigorously  than  ever  if 
a  leg  is  affected;  if  an  arm,  they  should  turn  over  on  the  back  and 
swim  with  the  leg  stroke,  in  the  meantime  rubbing  the  affected  arm 
vigorously. 

9.  The  undertaking  of  hazardous  ventures  for  the  sake  of  display 
should  meet  the  unqualified  condemnation  of  those  in  charge  of  this 
instruction,  since  many  fatalities  are  directly  traceable  to  such 
foolhardiness. 

10.  Lack  of  confidence  is  never  overcome  by  drastic  measures  or 
ridicule;  gentleness  and  perseverance  will  be  found  much  more 
efficacious.  Fearsomeness  while  in  the  water  is  usually  not  due  to 
cowardliness  but  to  a  lack  of  confidence  or  to  an  Inherent  fear  over 
which  many  who  do  not  lack  bravery  in  other  things  have  no  control. 

11.  Going  to  the  assistance  of  a  drowning  man  is  at  best  a  very 
precarious  undertaking  and  should,  therefore,  be  limited  to  those 
who  are  cool-headed  and  strong  swimmers. 

12.  In  approaching  a  man  in  danger  extreme  caution  should  be 
exercL'^ed  lest  he  grab  his  would-be  rescuer.  The  approach  should 
be  from  the  left  and  rear,  leaving  the  right  arm  of  the  rescuer  free 
for  defensive  purposes  in  case  he  should  be  clutched.     The  helpless 


334  MANUAL   OF  PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

man's  upper  arms  should  be  firmly  gripped  and  he  should  be  pulled 
over  on  his  back,  the  rescuer,  too,  turning  on  his  back  and  to\ring  the 
other  in  by  using  the  backstroke.  The  men  should  be  instructed  in 
this  method,  using  each  other  as  subjects. 

]3.  In  an  extremity,  when  a  rescuer  finds  his  life  is  being  endan- 
gered, he  should  not  hesitate  to  resort  to  extreme  measures  of  self- 
defense,  such  as  striking  with  the  fist  between  the  eyes,  choking,  or 
submerging  the  head  of  him  to  whose  rescue  he  has  gone.  Restora- 
tion to  consciousness  is  readily  accomplished,  if  unconsciousness 
has  resulted  from  this  treatment,  once  land  has  been  reached. 

RESTORATION  OF  THOSE  APPARENTLY  DEAD  FROM 
DROWNING. 

As  soon  as  the  body  has  been  recovered,  resuscitation  should,  if 
the  weather  is  not  inclement,  be  attempted  on  the  spot. 

1.  Remove  all  the  clothing  from  the  patient's  chest. 

2.  Place  him  on  the  ground,  face  down,  and  grasp  him  under  the 
abdomen  and  raise  him  up.  This  vrill  give  the  water  he  has  .- wal- 
lowed an  opportunity  to  escape  and  free  the  air  passages. 

3.  Turn  the  patient  over,  and  with  a  handkerchief  wrapped 
around  the  first  finger  clean  the  mouth  and  nostrils. 

4.  Dran:  out  the  tongue  and  hold  it  in  that  position  by  an  elastic 
band,  string,  tape,  or  a  strip  of  cloth  torn  from  a  handkerchief:  or 
have  an  assistant  hold  it  with  his  fingers  wrapped  in  a  handkerchief 
or cloth. 

5.  Use  the  following  method  of  artificial  respiration,  which  is 
known  as  the  Sylvester  method : 

Place  the  patient  on  his  back  and  lay  a  roll  of  clothing,  coat,  or 
other  garment  under  his  shoulders.  This  roll  must  be  large  enough 
to  raise  the  shoulders  and  throw  the  head  slightly  to  the  rear. 

6.  Kneel  at  his  head  and  grasp  his  arms,  one  in  each  hand,  with 
fingers  out  and  thumb  in.  just  below  the  elbows,  and  draw  the  arms 
outward,   awav   from   the  chest,    till   thev   meet   overhead.     This 


SWIMMING.  335 

movement  imitates  inspiration.  The  arms  are  then  turned  down  and 
forcibly  pressed  against  the  chest  for  a  moment.  This  movement 
imAtates  expiration.  Continue  these  movements  perseveringly  at  the 
rate  of  about  15  times  per  minute  until  signs  of  natural  respiration 
are  perceived. 

7.  While  those  mm'ements  are  going  on,  the  clothing  remaining 
on  the  i)atient  should  be  removed  by  an  assistant,  without  interfering 
vjith  the  artificial  respiration,  however.  WTien  the  body  is  stripped  it 
should  be  dried  and  covered  with  such  clothing  as  may  be  available. 

8.  An  attempt  to  produce  natural  respiration  by  exciting  the 
respiratory  nerves  may  also  be  made  by  holding  ammonia  to  the 
nostrils,  by  slapping  the  chest  alternately  with  cloths  wrung  out  in 
hot  and  cold  water,  or  by  tickling  the  nostrils  with  a  feather. 

9.  ^\^len  breathing  has  been  restored,  the  limbs  of  the  patient 
should  be  rubbed  upward,  toward  the  heart,  vigorously  in  order  to 
restore  the  circulation.  The  rubbing  should  be  done  under  the 
covering  as  much  as  possible,  and  in  order  to  restore  the  warmth  of 
the  body  extra  covering,  hot  flannels,  bricks,  or  bottles  should  be 
applied . 

10.  To  stimulate  the  vital  organs,  small  doses  of  aromatic  spirits  of 
ammonia  should  be  given. 

O 


WKTf.  or  CAUFMHlA 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


C' 


B  000  008  338  6 


U325 

A5 

1914 


■mM&§mm. 


fl|    Unj 


